SECTION 11 60 01

BROADCAST, THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT

Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how? Click Here) 
 Copyright 2016 -  2025 ARCAT, Inc. - All rights reserved

PART 1    GENERAL
1.1	SECTION INCLUDES
A.	Sound-control doors including the following:
1.	Integrated sound control door assemblies.
B.	Acoustic room components including the following:
1.	Acoustical wall and ceiling panels. (Traditional Acoustic Panel Series)
2.	Tunable wall panels. (Dynamic Acoustic Panel Series)
3.	Motorized acoustical banners.
C.	Theater and stage equipment including the following:
1.	Acoustical clouds.
2.	Acoustical shells, DIVA.
3.	Acoustical shells, Maestro.
4.	Acoustical shells, Legacy Classic. 
5.	Acoustic tower, Legacy Select Acoustic Tower.
6.	Stage tower transporter.
7.	Orchestra pit fillers.
8.	Orchestra pit fillers and stage platforms.
9.	Outdoor stage platforms. 
D.	Specialty casework including the following:
1.	Musical instrument storage casework.
2.	Music library system.
3.	Fixed theater make-up stations.
4.	Portable theater make-up stations.
5.	Metal shelving systems.
E.	Special purpose rooms including the following:
1.	Modular sound-isolation practice rooms.
F.	Fixed audience seating including the following: 
1.	Fixed, upholstered theater seating.
G.	Curtains and Rigging Systems:
1.	Fire curtain systems, brail fire curtain.
2.	Fire curtain systems, straight lift curtain, proscenium opening up to 18'T x 34'W.
3.	Fire curtain systems, straight lift curtain, proscenium opening up to 22'T x 42'W.
4.	Fire curtain systems, straight lift curtain, proscenium opening up to 30'T x 50'W.
5.	Fire curtain systems, straight lift curtain, proscenium opening greater than 30'T x 50'W.
6.	Fire curtain systems, curtain accessories.
7.	Counterweight rigging.
8.	PowerLift hoist.
9.	Varion hoist.
10.	Titan hoist.
11.	PowerAssist hoist.
12.	PowerLine hoist. 
13.	Self-Climbing hoist.
14.	Performer hoist.
15.	Custom line shaft hoist.
16.	Drum hoist.
17.	Pile-up drum hoist.
18.	Summit hoist. 
19.	Hoist rigging.
20.	Motorized rigging accessories.
21.	Motion control system.
22.	Stage curtains and tracks.
23.	Rope and dead hung rigging.
1.2	RELATED SECTIONS
A.	Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing. 
B.	Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.
C.	Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.
D.	Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
E.	Section 08 11 13.16 - Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
F.	Section 08 71 53 - Security Door Hardware.
G.	Section 09 22 16.13 - Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing.
H.	Section 09 21 16.23 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies.
I.	Section 09 65 13 - Resilient Base and Accessories.
J.	Section 12 32 16 - Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework.
K.	Section 13 21 48 - Sound-Conditioned Rooms.
L.	Section 26 55 60 - Theater Lighting and Controls.
1.3	REFERENCES
A.	American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1.	ACI 117 - Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
B.	American Hardboard Association (AHA):
1.	AHA A135.4-95: Basic Hardboard.
C.	American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) and Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE): 
1.	AISI/SAE1008/1010/1015 - Steel and Alloys.
D.	American Laminators Association (ALA):
1.	ALA GP 28.
E.	American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1.	ANSI 115.1: Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware.
2.	ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard.
3.	ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard.
4.	ANSI A250.10: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
5.	ANSI B17.1 - Keys and Key Seats. 
6.	ANSI B18.2.1 - Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws. 
7.	ANSI B18.2.2 - Nuts for General Application: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts. 
8.	ANSI B106.1M - Design of Transmission Shafting.
9.	ANSI E1.4 - Entertainment Technology - Manual Counterweight Rigging Systems. 
10.	ANSI E1.6-1 - Entertainment Technology - Powered Hoist Systems. 
11.	ANSI E1.11-2008, Entertainment Technology - USITT DMX512-A, Asynchronous Serial Digital Data Transmission Standard for Controlling Lighting Equipment and Accessories.
a.	Products utilizing the DMX512 standard Entertainment Services & Technology Association (ESTA), ANSI E1.11-2008, Entertainment Technology - USITT DMX512-A, Asynchronous Serial Digital Data Transmission Standard for Controlling Lighting Equipment and Accessories shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the following standard: ANSI E1.27-1-2006, Entertainment Technology-Standard for Portable Control Cables for Use with USITT DMX512/1990 and E1.11 (DMX512- A) Products.
12.	ANSI E1.20-2010, Entertainment Technology - RDM - Remote Device Management over USITT DMX512 Networks.
13.	ANSI E1.22 - Entertainment Technology - Fire Safety Curtain Systems.
14.	ANSI E1.31-2018 - Entertainment Technology - Lightweight streaming protocol for transport of DMX512 using ACN.
15.	ANSI E1.33 - Entertainment Technology - (RDMnet) - Message Transport And Device Management Of ANSI E1.20 (RDM) Compatible And Similar Devices Over IP Networks.
16.	ANSI E1.3-2001 (R2021), Entertainment Technology - Lighting Control Systems - 0 to 10V Analog Control Specification.
a.	Products utilizing a �0-10V Sinking� control protocol shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the following standard: IEC Standard 60929 Annex E and follow Pathway Connectivity Solutions Best Practices for Dynamic 0-10v LED Lighting Control document https://pathway.acuitybrands.com/-/media/abl/pathway/files/resources/reference-guides/0-10vdc-best-practice.pdf
17.	ANSI E1.9-2007 (R2023) Entertainment Technology - Reporting Photometric Performance Data for Luminaires Used in Entertainment Lighting. 
18.	ANSI E1.35-2013(R2022), Standard for Lens Quality Measurements for Pattern Projecting Luminaires Intended for Entertainment Use. 
19.	ANSI E1.47 - Entertainment Technology - Recommended Guidelines for Entertainment Rigging System Inspections. 
20.	ANSI Z535.4 - Product Safety Signs and Labels. 
21.	ANSI-BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
F.	American Plywood Association (APA). 
1.	Performance Standards and Policies for Structural Use Panels.
G.	American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1.	ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
H.	Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
1.	Quality Manual, 8th Edition.
I.	ASTM International (ASTM):
1.	ASTM A36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2.	ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 
3.	ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 
4.	ASTM A500 -Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
5.	ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 
6.	ASTM A510 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel. 
7.	ASTM A513 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing.
8.	ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
9.	ASTM A789 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
10.	ASTM A1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
11.	ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low Alloy With Improved Formability, and Ultra High Strength. 
12.	ASTM B85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Die Castings.
13.	ASTM B26 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 
14.	ASTM B108 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings. 
15.	ASTM B179 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloys in Ingot and Molten Forms for Castings from All Casting Processes.
16.	ASTM B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
17.	ASTM B221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
18.	ASTM B429 - Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube.
19.	ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
20.	ASTM C510 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel.
21.	ASTM C503 - Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror.
22.	ASTM D3597 - Standard Performance Specification for Woven Upholstery Fabrics - Plan, Tufted, or Flocked.
23.	ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
24.	ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
25.	ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Transmission.
26.	ASTM E488 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.
27.	ASTM E795 - Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests.
28.	ASTM F851: Test Method for Self-Rising Seat Mechanisms.
29.	ASTM F1145 - Standard Specification for Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Forged.
J.	Audio Engineering Society (AES): AES-4id - AES information document for room acoustics and sound reinforcement systems -- Characterization and measurement of surface scattering uniformity. 
K.	Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. 
L.	California, Department of Consumers Affairs, Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation:
1.	California Technical Bulletin 117 - requirements, Test Procedures and Apparatus for Testing Flame Retardance of Resilient Filling Materials Used in Upholstered Furniture.
M.	Canadian Electrical Code (CDC).
N.	Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 
1.	16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
2.	16 CFR 1610.61 - Clarification of Flammability Standard for Clothing Textiles (CS 191-53).
O.	GREENGUARD Environmental Institute (GEI): GREENGUARD certified low emitting products.
P.	Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA): HPVA HP-1 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 
Q.	IEEE SA Standards Association (IEEE): 
1.	IEEE 802.3 - IEEE Standard for Ethernet.
2.	IEEE 802.3AF  - Power over Ethernet Powering Scheme.
R.	International Organization for Standardization (ISO): ISO 9001 Quality management systems - Requirements.
S.	International Building Code (IBC).
1.	IBC 2018, Chapter 8.
T.	Laminating Materials Association: 
1.	LMA EDG-1: Voluntary Product Standard and Typical Physical Properties of Edgebanding Materials.
2.	LMA SAT-1: Voluntary Product Standard and Typical Physical Properties of Saturated Paper Overlays.
U.	National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
V.	National Electrical Code (NEC).
W.	National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA LD 3-2000 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
X.	National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 80 - Standard For Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
Y.	Telecommunication Industry Association (TIA): 
1.	TIA-568A/B - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
Z.	Underwriter's Laboratory (UL): 
1.	UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2.	UL 508E - IEC Type '2' Coordination Short Circuit Tests of Electromechanical Motor Controllers in Accordance with IEC Publication 947-4-1.
3.	UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
4.	UL 924 - Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
5.	UL 1480, UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Product and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Heating Spaces.
6.	UL 1573 - Standard for Stage and Studio Luminaires and Connector Strips. 
7.	UL 1598 - Standard for Luminaires.
AA.	U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
AB.	U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology: DOC PS 1: U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.4	SUBMITTALS
A.	Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
B.	Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.	Provide test results by certified independent testing laboratory indicating compliance with performance requirements.
2.	Rated capacities, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
3.	Maintenance instructions and recommendations. 
4.	Acoustical testing data demonstrating minimal compliance with required acoustical performance criteria. 
5.	Photometric data for light fixtures, if applicable to the product.
C.	Shop Drawings:
1.	Submit component and project specific installation drawings, cut sheets, and schedules showing all information necessary to fully explain the design features, appearance, function, fabrication, installation, and use of system components in all phases of operation. Submit for approval before beginning any fabrication, installation, or erection. 
2.	Include fabrication and installation details. Distinguish between factory and field work. 
3.	Include plans, elevations, sections, attachments and work by other trades.
4.	Include wiring diagrams when applicable.
5.	Indicate seismic bracing and fastening requirements as applicable.
6.	For theater seating, develop sightline plan and sections through seating areas using sightlines program and sightline rules.  Include options placement, electrical schematic for aisle lighting and placement of seating with table arms as applicable.
D.	Coordination Drawings: Project-specific Coordination Drawings, indicating the following items drawn and coordinated with each other. Include information required by Installers of each item in order to coordinate the Work. Include the following:
1.	Relationship of items shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2.	Dimensions and required clearances of adjacent or related work.
3.	Order of assembly of separate items.
4.	Information required for interface with other trades and components, including mechanical, electrical, and communication work.
E.	Product Schedule: 
1.	Use designations indicated on the Drawings.
2.	Include room locations, dimensions, accessories, finishes, and project specific notes. 
F.	Verification Samples: 
1.	Exposed Finishes and Finish Materials: Not less than 4 by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm), for each type, color, pattern, surface and material selected.
G.	Closeout Submittals:
1.	Operation and Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing and replacing components and accessories.
2.	Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty.
3.	As-Built Drawings:  For completed work.
H.	Field Quality Control Reports: Documenting inspections and demonstrations of installed products and equipment.
1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.	Source Limitations: Obtain all products from a single manufacturer through one source providing a comprehensive material and installation package:
B.	Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in design and manufacturing of similar products on projects of similar size, scope and complexity, and with the production capacity to meet the construction and installation schedule.
C.	Installer Qualifications: ESTA-certified and experienced in installation of the work of this section and acceptable to the manufacturer and in the regular employ of the manufacturer.
D.	Electrical Components: Listed and labeled per NFPA 70, Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
E.	Regulatory Requirements: Where components are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities".
F.	Curtain and Rigging Systems, Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in manufacture of similar products in use in similar environments, including project size, and complexity, and with the production capacity to meet the construction and installation schedule. 
1.	Theatrical rigging systems are specialized overhead lifting systems. Due to the highly specialized nature of theatrical rigging equipment, and the safety requirements of the equipment, the rigging products provided for this work shall be the products of a single rigging manufacturer for quality, consistency and ease of integration. Accessory items such as wire rope, fittings, and curtain tracks may be from other specialty manufacturers. 
2.	The rigging manufacturer shall have the following programs in place. 
a.	The manufacturer shall have a product testing program, including determination of recommended working loads for products based on destructive testing and review by a licensed engineer. 
b.	The manufacturer shall carry primary product and general liability insurance of $2,000,000 each, with excess liability coverage of $10,000,000 and a Contractors Professional Liability policy with $2,000,000 coverage. 
G.	Rigging Systems, Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 
1.	The Rigging Contractor shall be an approved rigging manufacturer or an authorized representative or dealer of an approved manufacturer. The contractor shall have been installing stage rigging systems for a period of five years or more, and shall have completed at least ten installations of this type and scope. The AHJ shall be the final judge of the suitability of experience. 
2.	The Rigging Contractor shall employ an Entertainment Technician Certification Program (ETCP) Certified Theatre Rigger. A Certified Rigger shall be either the project manager or site foreman, and be responsible for the overall project including the layout, inspection, and onsite user training. 
H.	Rigging Systems, Minimum Standards of Safety, the following factors shall be used: 
1.	Cables and Fittings: 8:1 Safety Factor. 
2.	Cable D/d ratio: Sheave tread diameter is the minimum D/d ratio per the "Wire Rope User Manual" or recommended by the wire rope manufacturer. 
3.	Tread Pressures: 500 lbs. for cast iron, 900 lbs. for Nylatron, 1000 lbs. for steel. 
4.	Maximum Fleet Angle: 1-1/2 degrees. 
5.	Steel: 1/5 of yield strength or per AISC Specification. 
6.	Bearings: Two times required load at full speed for 2000 hours. 
7.	Bolts: Minimum SAE J429 Grade 5 (ISO R898 Class 8.8), zinc plated. 
8.	Motors: 1.0 NEMA Service Factor. 
9.	Gearboxes: 1.25 Mechanical Strength Service Factor, 1.0 Gearing Service Factor.
1.6	DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.	Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's labels attached. Do not deliver material until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation. Ship to jobsite only after roughing-in, painting and other finishing work has been completed, installation areas are ready to accept work.
B.	Handle and install materials to avoid damage.
1.7	PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS 
A.	Convene at the project site or conduct a virtual meeting a minimum of two weeks prior to starting the Work of this Section.
1.8	PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.	Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install materials until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.	Field Measurements: Verify field measurements as indicated on Shop Drawings. Where measurements are not possible, provide control dimensions and templates. 
1.	Coordinate installation and location of blocking and supports as requested. 
2.	Verify openings, clearances, storage requirements and other dimensions relevant to the installation and final application. 
3.	Where applicable, coordinate locations of electrical junction boxes.
C.	Field Measurements: Verify field measurements as indicated on Shop Drawings. Where measurements are not possible, provide control dimensions and templates. 
1.	Coordinate locations of electrical junction boxes.
D.	Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
1.9	WARRANTY
A.	Special Warranty for Sound Control Doors: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace components of sound-control door assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.	Fracturing or breaking of unit components including doors and hardware resulting from normal use other than vandalism.
2.	Warping or deterioration of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
3.	Failure of acoustical gaskets and seals.
B.	Special Warranty for Theater and Stage Equipment:  Provide manufacturer's standard limited 5 year warranty from the date of delivery of the product except as indicated below.
1.	Maestro Acoustical Shell - 2 year warranty; Legacy Classic Acoustical Shell - 10 year warranty; Legacy Select Acoustic Tower - 10 year warranty; Orchestra Pit Fillers - 5 year warranty; Stage Platforms (Stage Tek) - 10 year warranty.
C.	Special Warranty for Acoustic Room Components: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace panels that fail in materials or workmanship. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.	Fracturing or breaking of unit components which results from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism.
2.	Warping of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
3.	Failure of unit to perform acoustically in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
4.	Sound-Absorbing and Sound-Diffusing Panels Warranty Period: 5 years.
5.	Tunable Wall Panels Warranty Period: 5 years.
6.	Motorized Acoustical Banners Warranty Period: 3 years.
D.	Special Warranty for Specialty Casework: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace components of specialty casework that fail in materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.	Fracturing or breaking of casework components including doors, panels, shelves, or hardware resulting from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism.
2.	Delamination or other failures of glue bond of components.
3.	Warping of casework components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
4.	Failure of operating hardware.
E.	Special Warranty for Fixed Seating: Special Warranty:  Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer�s intent to repair or replace components of audience seating that fail in materials or workmanship.  Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 
1.	Fracturing or breaking of unit components which results from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism. 
2.	Delamination or other failures of glue bond of components. 
3.	Warping of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity. 
4.	Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. 
5.	Accessories that are of a consumable nature such as bulbs, aisle lights and transformers are excluded. 
6.	Warranty Period: 
a.	Structure (including back bracket, standard, metal base): 10 years. 
b.	Operating mechanisms (including seat/back cushion, wood works (wood panels/armrest/ADA end arms), polypropylene parts (polypropylene shells, polypropylene armrest), tip-up seat mechanism, writing tablet (including writing tablet mechanism): 10 years. 
c.	Accessories (such numbering, moveable base, and similar items): 10 years.
F.	Special Warranty for Special Purpose Rooms: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace components of sound-isolation practice rooms that fail in materials or workmanship within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.	Fracturing or breaking of room components, including doors, panels, or hardware, that results from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism.
2.	Delamination or other failures of glue bond of components.
3.	Warping of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
4.	Failure of operating hardware.
5.	Failure of acoustical gaskets and seals.
6.	Failure of room to perform acoustically in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
G.	Special Warranty for Curtain Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard limited 3 year warranty against defects in materials or workmanship from the date of Substantial Completion. The warranty is contingent on inspection of the equipment and training of its use being provided annually by an Entertainment Technician Certification Program (ETCP) Certified Theatre Rigger at the Owner's expense. It is the responsibility of the end user to make arrangements for the annual inspection and training. Failure to obtain the inspection and training annually shall result in a one year warranty. The warranty shall not cover equipment that has become defective due to misuse, abuse, accident, act of God, alteration, vandalism, ordinary wear and tear, improper maintenance, or used not in a manner intended. 
H.	Special Warranty for Rigging Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard limited 3 year warranty against defects in materials or workmanship from the date of Substantial Completion. The warranty is contingent on inspection of the equipment and training of its use being provided annually by an Entertainment Technician Certification Program (ETCP) Certified Theatre Rigger at the Owner's expense. It is the responsibility of the end user to make arrangements for the annual inspection and training. Failure to obtain the inspection and training annually shall reduce warranty coverage to one year after substantial completion. The warranty shall not cover equipment that has become defective due to misuse, abuse, accident, act of God, alteration, vandalism, ordinary wear and tear, improper maintenance, or used not in a manner intended.
1.10	EXTRA MATERIALS/ATTIC STOCK FOR FIXED SEATING 
A.	Furnish the following extra materials from the same manufacturing run as the original products that match products installed. Package with protective coating and identified with product labels. 
1.	Full-size units of the following seating components equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than two units: 
2.	Arm standards (both center and end standards). 
3.	Wooden/polypropylene seat back and cushion covers. 
4.	Seat bottom. 
5.	Lighting Components devices. 
6.	Fabric seat/back covers.
PART 2    PRODUCTS
2.1	MANUFACTURERS
A.	Acceptable Manufacturer: Wenger Corporation, including all Wenger, J.R. Clancy and GearBoss product brands. Wenger Corporation, which is located at: 555 Park Dr.; Owatonna, MN 55060; Toll Free Tel: 800-4WENGER (493-6437); Tel: (507) 455-4100; Fax: (507) 455-4258; Email: request info (info@wengercorp.com); Wenger Corporation - Syracuse, which is located at 7041 Interstate Island Road, Syracuse, NY 13209; Toll Free Tel: 800-836-1885; Tel: (315) 451-3440; Email: request info (info@wengercorp.com); Web: https://www.wengercorp.com
B.	Substitutions: Not permitted.
C.	Requests for substitutions shall be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 
1.	Manufacturers seeking approval shall submit the following:
a.	Product data, including third-party certified acoustical data and proposed graphic/drawing layout for this project.
b.	Project references: Minimum of 5 installations not less than 3 years old, of comparable size, scope and complexity of this project, complete with owner contact information.
c.	Sample warranty.
2.	Submit substitution request not less than required days prior to bid date.
3.	Approval shall be indicated by issuance of written Addendum.
4.	Approved manufacturers shall meet separate requirements of Submittals Article.
5.	Manufacturers� products that are either listed as pre-approved in these Specifications or who have been granted approval as an alternate must still demonstrate all of the material performance and operational characteristics required by this Section.
D.	Rigging Systems, Requirements for Approval: Other equipment manufacturers seeking approval shall submit the following information at least 2 weeks prior to the bid opening date. Approval of manufacturers shall be by addenda. Failure to submit any of the required information shall automatically disqualify the manufacturers from consideration of approval. 
1.	Evidence that the manufacturer has been in business for a minimum of ten years manufacturing stage equipment. 
2.	A listing of 10 equivalent installations, including: 
a.	Name, address and telephone number of owner.
b.	Name, address and telephone number of architect.
c.	Scope of work. 
3.	A brief written description of the manufacturer's operation including facilities, financial capabilities, and experience of key personnel. 
4.	Written, third party evidence showing that the manufacturer has the testing, quality management and insurance programs required above in place. 
2.2	INTEGRATED SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
A.	Basis of Design: Sound Control Door Assemblies as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.	Performance Requirements: Provide sound-control door assemblies identical to assemblies tested by an independent testing agency per ASTM E 90 with the specified minimum certified STC rating per ASTM E 413 for the configurations indicated.
1.	Acoustical performance shall meet manufacturer's published data for transmission loss based on door type specified.
C.	Compliance for Fire-Rated Sound-Control Door and Frame Assemblies: 
1.	NFPA 80 compliant, listed and labeled by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.	Test at equalized pressure per UL 10C.
D.	Safety Glass Compliance: Products must comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
E.	Compliance with Accessibility Requirements:
1.	Americans with Disabilities Act/Architectural Barriers Act (ADA/ABA).
2.	Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).
3.	ANSI A117.1.
4.	FED-STD-795 Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.
F.	Non-Fire Rated Doors:
1.	Door Type: 3070 Solid Door.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 50. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3 feet. 
2.	Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 99 sq in (639 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 50. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3 feet. 
3.	Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 660 sq in (4258 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3 feet. 
4.	Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 51. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3 feet. 
5.	Door Type: 3570 Solid Door.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 52. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3.5 feet. 
6.	Door Type: 3570 Solid Door with 99 sq in (639 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 52. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3.5 feet. 
7.	Door Type: 3570 Solid Door with 660 sq in (4258 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3.5 feet. 
8.	Door Type: 3570 Solid Door with 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 52. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3.5 feet. 
9.	Door Type: 4070 Solid Door.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 53. 
b.	Nominal Width: 4 feet. 
10.	Door Type: 4070 Solid Door with 99 sq in (639 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 54. 
b.	Nominal Width: 4 feet. 
11.	Door Type: 4070 Solid Door with 660 sq in (4258 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 4 feet. 
12.	Door Type: 4070 Solid Door with 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 53. 
b.	Nominal Width: 4 feet. 
13.	Door Type: 6070 Solid Door.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 6 feet. 
14.	Door Type: 6070 Solid Door with 99 sq in (639 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 6 feet. 
15.	Door Type: 6070 Solid Door with 660 sq in (4258 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 6 feet. 
16.	Door Type: 6070 Solid Door with 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: 51. 
b.	Nominal Width: 6 feet. 
G.	Fire Rated Doors: 1 Hour rating.
1.	Door Type: 3070 Solid Door.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 49.
b.	Nominal Width: 3 feet. 
2.	Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 99 sq in (639 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 48. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3 feet. 
3.	Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 660 sq in (4258 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3 feet. 
4.	Door Type: 3570 Solid Door.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.	Nominal Width: 3.5 feet. 
5.	Door Type: 3570 Solid Door with 99 sq in (639 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 3.5 feet. 
6.	Door Type: 4070 Solid Door.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.	Nominal Width: 4 feet. 
7.	Door Type: 4070 Solid Door with 99 sq in (639 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 4 feet. 
8.	Door Type: 6070 Solid Door.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.	Nominal Width: 6 feet. 
9.	Door Type: 6070 Solid Door with 99 sq in (639 sq cm) window.
a.	Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated. 
b.	Nominal Width: 6 feet. 
H.	Sound-Control Door Assemblies: Provide sound-control door assemblies consisting of acoustically engineered door and frame combination with engineered sound seals.
1.	Designation in schedule on Drawings: SCD# ___.
2.	Door Configuration: Single leaf.
3.	Door Configuration: Double leaf.
4.	Door Configuration: As scheduled on Drawings.
5.	Door Leaf Size: 36 inch (91 mm).
6.	Door Leaf Size: 42 inch (107 mm).
7.	Door Leaf Size: 48 inch (122 mm).
8.	Door Leaf Size: As scheduled on Drawings.
9.	Glazing Lite Size, per Door: None.
10.	Glazing Lite Size, per Door: 99 sq in (639 sq cm).
11.	Glazing Lite Size, per Door: 660 sq in (4258 sq cm).
12.	Glazing Lite Size, per Door: 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm).
13.	Glazing Lite Size, per Door: As scheduled on Drawings.
14.	Fire Rating: None.
15.	Fire Rating: 60 minutes.
16.	Fire Rating: As scheduled on Drawings.
17.	Assembly Sound Transmission Class (STC): ___.
18.	Assembly Sound Transmission Class (STC): Not rated.
19.	Assembly Sound Transmission Class (STC): As scheduled on Drawings.
I.	General: Provide flush-type steel sound-control doors minimum 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) thick, with split, crimped, and gasketed isolation construction with harmonically unbalanced steel face thicknesses and window lite thicknesses. Fabricate without visible seams on exposed faces.
1.	Door Cores: Manufacturer's standard meeting specified STC rating.
2.	Door Cores: Manufacturer's standard meeting specified STC and fire rating.
3.	Door Cores: Manufacturer's standard meeting requirements for STC and fire rating as scheduled on Drawings.
4.	Door Face Sheets: 14 gauge/0.067 inch (1.7 mm) and 12 gauge/0.093 inch (2.3 mm) cold-rolled steel sheet, on opposing faces.
J.	Door Hardware Reinforcement: Minimum 14 gauge (0.067 inch) (1.7 mm), hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel sheet as reinforcement for hinges, lock face, flush bolts, closers, and concealed holders.
K.	Acoustic Vision Lite Assembly: Metal-framed unit consisting of harmonic vibration-resistant 1/4 inch (6.0 mm) and 3/8 inch (9.0 mm) thick laminated glazing with 2.81 inch (71 mm) interspace.
L.	Frame Fabrication: 
1.	Materials: 14 gauge/0.067 inch (1.7 mm) cold-rolled steel sheet.
2.	Construction: Full-welded unit.
3.	Corners: Mitered and reinforced.
4.	Frame Design: Split frame design with integrated frame support for metal threshold. 
5.	Frame Acoustic Liner, Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Factory-installed sound-absorbing material behind acoustic seal rabbet.
M.	Frame Hardware Reinforcement: Minimum 14 gauge/0.067 inch (1.7 mm) reinforcement for hinges, lock face, and closers.
N.	Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard acoustical seals, threshold, and hinges required to achieve sound control performance requirements specified.
O.	Acoustical Seals:
1.	Head and Jambs, Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Extruded flexible vinyl with dual magnetic seals, uninterrupted at hinge and latch.
2.	Head and Jambs, Fire Rated Doors: Silicone compression seal, uninterrupted at hinge and latch, with intumescent material in jamb meeting requirements of fire-resistance assembly specified in Quality Assurance Article.
3.	Door Bottoms: Fixed in place foam and fiberglass-backed, teflon-coated sweep seal, field-adjustable, providing sound control seal without mechanical drop operation.
P.	Hinges: Cam-lift wrap-around continuous barrel-type hinge.
Q.	Metal Thresholds: Flat, smooth plate stainless steel, 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) high, profiled to provide sound control seal with door bottom seal.
R.	Locksets: Provide door manufacturer's standard mortise lockset.
S.	Locksets: Provide door with standard mortise pocket prepared to receive mortise lockset specified in another Division 08 section and frame prepared to receive standard strike plate, with door edge and frame cover plates included.
T.	Other Door Hardware: Refer to requirements of Section 08 71 53 - Security Door Hardware.
U.	Fasteners: Refer to Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
V.	General Fabrication: 
1.	Fabricate sound-control door assemblies to same tolerances as tested units meeting performance requirements. 
2.	Form surfaces smooth and flush with invisible joints when doors are closed. 
3.	Factory-assemble doors, frames, manufacturer-provided hardware, and glazed lites.
W.	Door Fabrication: 
1.	Form metal doors to required sizes with minimum radius. 
2.	Join door faces at vertical edges by welding or crimping method identical to manufacturer's tested units.
X.	Frame Fabrication: 
1.	Form metal frames to required sizes with minimum radius. 
2.	Weld joints continuously. 
3.	Make joints smooth, flush, and invisible. 
4.	Provide plaster guards where required to contain grout or mortar. 
Y.	Hardware Preparation: In compliance with ANSI A115.1.
1.	Factory-prepare assemblies to received hardware. 
2.	Prepare for hardware mounting as recommended by manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's acoustically tested assemblies.
Z.	Primer: Factory primed for field-applied painted finish.
1.	Type: Manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free primer.
2.	Compliance: ANSI A250.10.
3.	Thickness: Minimum 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.
2.3	TRADITIONAL ACOUSTIC PANEL SERIES
A.	Basis of Design: Provide a system of acoustical panels, as manufactured by Wenger Corporation, that absorb or diffuse sound in a configuration designed to reduce excess sound energy levels and improve sound distribution throughout the space.
B.	Performance Requirements: Provide sound absorbing and sound-diffusing panels meeting requirements with the following characteristics: 
1.	Wall Panel Mounting Types for Acoustical Performance Characteristics according to ASTM E 795, with measurements determined according to ASTM C 423:
a.	No air space.
2.	Ceiling Diffuser Panel Mounting Types for Acoustical Performance Characteristics according to ASTM E 795, with measurements determined according to ASTM C 423:
a.	No air space.
b.	E-150: 6 inches (152 mm) air space.
c.	E-400: 16 inches (410 mm) air space.
C.	Wall and Ceiling Absorber Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel, with fabric covering laminated to front face of rigid glass-fiber board, with chemically hardened edges, with the following characteristics:
1.	Basis of Design Product: Wenger Wall Absorber Panel and Ceiling Absorber Panel.
2.	Absorber Panel Size: Width and length indicated on the Drawings.
a.	Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm). 
b.	Thickness: 3 inches (76 mm). 
c.	Thickness: 4 inches (102 mm). 
3.	Fabric Covering: Manufacturer's standard, color and pattern as selected.
4.	Wall Panel Mounting Method: Metal wall bracket with panel-mounted z-bracket.
5.	Ceiling Panel Mounting Method: 
a.	Direct mount with brackets attached to panel back. 
b.	Wire suspension from brackets attached to panel back. 
6.	Acoustical Performance, 2 inches (51 mm) thick, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inches (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A:
a.	125Hz = 0.50. 
b.	250Hz = 0.96. 
c.	500Hz = 1.27. 
d.	1000Hz = 1.27. 
e.	2000Hz = 1.23. 
f.	4000Hz = 1.18. 
7.	Acoustical Performance, 3 inches  (76 mm) thick, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inches (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A: 
a.	125Hz = 0.65. 
b.	250Hz = 1.10. 
c.	500Hz = 1.31. 
d.	1000Hz = 1.23. 
e.	2000Hz = 1.20. 
f.	4000Hz = 1.09.
8.	Acoustical Performance, 4 inches (102 mm) thick, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inches (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A: 
a.	125Hz = 0.84.
b.	250Hz = 1.17.
c.	500Hz = 1.34.
d.	1000Hz = 1.32.
e.	2000Hz = 1.25.
f.	4000Hz = 1.20.
D.	Convex Wall Diffuser Panels: Acoustically-configured, polycylindrical convex molded thermoplastic panel, 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick, width and length indicated, and with the following characteristics:
1.	Basis of Design Product: Wenger Type I Convex Wall Diffuser.
2.	Fabric Covering: Manufacturer's standard, color and pattern as selected.
3.	Wall Panel Mounting Method: Metal wall bracket with panel-mounted z-bracket.
4.	Sound Transmission Class (STC): ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413: 23.
5.	Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inches (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A.
a.	125Hz = 0.18. 
b.	250Hz = 0.18. 
c.	500Hz = 0.13. 
d.	1000Hz = 0.10. 
e.	2000Hz = 0.12. 
f.	4000Hz = 0.16. 
E.	Convex Ceiling Diffuser Panels: Acoustically-configured, polycylindrical convex molded thermoplastic panel, 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick, and width and length indicated.
1.	Basis of Design Product: Wenger Convex Ceiling Diffuser Panels.
2.	Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured white.
3.	Ceiling Panel Mounting Method: 
a.	Direct mount with brackets attached to panel back.
b.	Wire suspension from brackets attached to panel back .
c.	Lay-in ceiling grid clip. All lay-in ceiling panels include safety cable attachment to permanent ceiling grid in all four corners of ceiling panel.
4.	Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inches (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A.
a.	125Hz = 0.20.
b.	250Hz = 0.11.
c.	500Hz = 0.17.
d.	1000Hz = 0.04. 
e.	2000Hz = 0.09.
f.	4000Hz = 0.21.
F.	Convex Wall Diffuser/Absorber Panels: Acoustically-configured, selectively sound-absorptive polycylindrical convex molded thermoplastic panel, 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick, width and length indicated, with sound attenuation board adhered to internal surface of panel.
1.	Basis of Design Product: Wenger Type II Convex Wall Diffuser Panels.
2.	Fabric Covering: Manufacturer's standard, color and pattern as selected.
3.	Wall Panel Mounting Method: Metal wall bracket with panel-mounted grooved button.
4.	Sound Transmission Class (STC): ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413: 23.
5.	Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inches (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A.
a.	125Hz = 0.34. 
b.	250Hz = 0.27. 
c.	500Hz = 0.14. 
d.	1000Hz = 0.11. 
e.	2000Hz = 0.11. 
f.	4000Hz = 0.19.
G.	Pyramidal Ceiling Diffuser Panels: Acoustically-configured, offset pyramidal molded thermoplastic impact-resistant panel 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick, length and width indicated.
1.	Basis of Design Product: Wenger Pyramidal Ceiling Diffuser.
2.	Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured white.
3.	Ceiling Panel Mounting Method: 
a.	Wire suspension from back-mounted brackets 
b.	Lay-in ceiling grid clip. All lay-in ceiling panels include safety cable attachment to permanent ceiling grid in all four corners of panel.
4.	Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inches (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A.
a.	125Hz = 0.27.
b.	250Hz = 0.18.
c.	500Hz = 0.09.
d.	1000Hz = 0.06.
e.	2000Hz = 0.03.
f.	4000Hz = 0.00.
H.	Quadratic Ceiling Diffuser Panel: Acoustically diffusing panel designed in accordance with quadratic theory with multiple wells of engineered depth in a molded thermoplastic panel, 48 by 48 inches (1219 by 1219 mm) by 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick.
1.	Basis of Design Product: Wenger Quadratic Ceiling Diffuser.
2.	Finish: Manufacturer's standard white.
3.	Ceiling Panel Mounting Method: Lay-in ceiling grid. All panels include safety cable attachment to permanent ceiling grid in all four corners of panel.
4.	Unit Weight: 35 lb (16 kg).
5.	Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2440 mm) unit, Mounting Type E-400.
a.	125Hz = 0.36. 
b.	250Hz = 0.54. 
c.	500Hz = 0.59. 
d.	1000Hz = 0.43. 
e.	2000Hz = 0.24. 
f.	4000Hz = 0.19. 
I.	Fabric Facing Material: 100 percent woven plain weave polyester 2-ply, with the following characteristics:
1.	Light Fastness: AATCC 16, Option 3: 40 hours.
2.	Fastness to Crocking: AATCC 8: #4 Wet and Dry.
3.	Flammability: ASTM E 84, Class A or 1.
4.	Basis of design product: Guilford of Maine, FR-701.
J.	Airborne Noise Reduction: Provide acoustical panels in layout designed by computer simulation based on Fitzroy formulas to provide the following sound reduction:
1.	Band Rehearsal: _____ dB +/- 0.5dB.
2.	Orchestra Rehearsal: _____ dB +/- 0.5dB.
3.	Choral Rehearsal: _____ dB +/- 0.5dB.
K.	Reverberation Time: Provide acoustical panels in layout designed by computer simulation based on Fitzroy formulas to provide the following reverberation times and amount of variability available in each room:
1.	Band Rehearsal: _____ +/- 0.2 seconds. Degree of change: _____ seconds.
2.	Orchestra Rehearsal: _____> +/- 0.2 seconds. Degree of change: _____ seconds.
3.	Choral Rehearsal: _____ +/- 0.2 seconds. Degree of change: _____ seconds.
L.	Fire-rating: The fully assembled product, as installed, shall meet Class A fire protection. Test results for flame spread and smoke developed shall be provided upon request. Individual component level fire test data is not sufficient to meet Class A fire protection requirements and shall not be accepted.
2.4	DYNAMIC ACOUSTIC PANEL SERIES
A.	Basis of Design: Provide a system of acoustical panels, as manufactured by Wenger Corporation, that absorb or diffuse sound in a configuration designed to increase or decrease the reverberation time up to .5 seconds at any time within the room.
1.	Panel Size: 4 feet x 4 feet (1219 mm x 1219 mm) and 4 feet x 8 feet (1219 mm x 2438 mm) as applicable; both sizes 12 inches (305 mm) deep.
2.	Fabric Covering: Manufacturer's standard, color and pattern as selected.
3.	Wall Panel Mounting Method: Metal wall bracket.
4.	Acoustical Performance: In compliance with manufacturer's published documentation for sound absorption.
B.	Fabric Facing Material: 100 percent woven plain weave polyester 2-ply, with the following characteristics:
1.	Light Fastness: AATCC 16, Option 3: 40 hours.
2.	Fastness to Crocking: AATCC 8: #4 Wet and Dry.
3.	Flammability: ASTM E 84, Class A or 1.
4.	Basis of design product: Guilford of Maine, Anchorage Series.
C.	Face Panel: Curved aluminum micro-perf sheet, containing absorptive and diffusive qualities.
D.	Panel End Caps: Top and bottom end caps constructed of 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick laminated composite board with 1/8 inch (3 mm) edge banding. 
1.	Woodgrain finish as scheduled or indicated. Refer to Drawings.
E.	Internal Adjustment: Absorber/Diffuser panel includes integrated steel actuator device which allows the panel to be changed to an absorber or diffuser by the use of an external handle.
F.	Side Frames: Integrated, radiused aluminum extrusions.
G.	Wall Brackets: Painted steel rail with holes to attach to wall studs, or mount to wall. 
2.5	MOTORIZED ACOUSTICAL BANNERS
A.	Basis of Design: Sound absorbing acoustical banner units, as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. comprised of housing, fabric banner, ball bearing rollers, motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. Provide units meeting performance requirements and requirements listed and labeled as an assembly by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
B.	Airborne Noise Reduction: Provide acoustical banners in layout designed by computer simulation based on Fitzroy formulas to provide the following sound reduction:
1.	Auditorium: _____ dB +/- 0.5dB.
C.	Reverberation Time: Provide acoustical absorber and diffuser panels in layout designed by computer simulation based on Fitzroy formulas to provide the following reverberation times:
1.	Auditorium: _____ +/- 0.2 seconds.
D.	Acoustical Performance, Synthetic Velour Double Layer, Sound Absorption Coefficient, ASTM C 423, one-third Octave Band Center Frequency: For banners of the following construction, spaced 9.5 inches (241 mm) from wall, with 3 inches (76 mm) between banner layers.
1.	200 Hz = 0.35. 
2.	250 Hz = 0.59. 
3.	500 Hz = 0.70. 
4.	1000 Hz = 0.87. 
5.	2000 Hz = 0.80. 
6.	4000 Hz = 0.80. 
E.	Acoustical Performance, Wool Serge Double Layer, Sound Absorption Coefficient, ASTM C 423, one-third Octave Band Center Frequency: For banners of the following construction, spaced 9.5 inches (241 mm) from wall, with 3 inches (76 mm) between banner layers. 
1.	200 Hz = 0.40. 
2.	250 Hz = 0.59. 
3.	500 Hz = 0.69. 
4.	1000 Hz = 0.87. 
5.	2000 Hz = 0.84. 
6.	4000 Hz = 0.84. 
F.	Flame Resistance: Provide fabric components complying with NFPA 701.
G.	Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency.
H.	Sound-Absorbing Acoustical Banners: Acoustical double-layer fabric banners with adjustable layer spacing and adjustable wall spacing, with motorized deployment and retraction, concealed when retracted within wall-mounted housing. Provide means of securing fabric allowing fabric to be easily removed for maintenance.
1.	Product: Wenger Corporation, Motorized Acoustical Banners.
2.	Banner Size: Size indicated on Drawings.
3.	Banner Acoustical Fabric: Synthetic velour front and back layer.
4.	Banner Acoustical Fabric: Wool serge front and back layer.
I.	Fabric Material:
1.	Synthetic Velour: 22 oz. (746 g/sq. m) medium weight polyester synthetic velour, inherently flame retardant, wrinkle-resistant and moisture resistant, in double layer.
2.	Wool Serge: 30 oz. /sq. yd. (1017 g/sq. m) matte finish, no nap direction, inherently flame retardant, in double layer.
3.	Colors/Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.
4.	Colors/Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
5.	Colors/Patterns: Specifier insert color selection.
J.	Housing: Manufacturer's standard enclosure consisting of aluminum extrusion frame with wood infill panels.
1.	Housing Closures and End Caps: Laminated wood as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard veneers and stains.
2.	Housing Closures and End Caps: Insert housing finish description.
3.	Mounting: Exposed wall-mounted.
4.	Mounting: Exposed ceiling-mounted.
5.	Mounting: Above ceiling-mounted.
K.	Operator and Controls: 
1.	Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing asynchronous motor of size and capacity recommended by acoustical banner manufacturer; with integrated motor controls, brakes, and encoders, permanently lubricated ball bearings, thermal-overload protection, limit switches, and positive-stop action.
2.	Power Supply: 120VAC/60 Hz.
3.	Controls: Provide control system utilizing main bus consisting of RS485 conductors using CAT 5 cabling, power insertion box and interface, and control switches. Provide manufacturer's address reader and limit setting tool.
a.	Control Switch: Remote up/down/stop control switch installed in recessed device box with cover plate. Provide number of control switches indicated for each banner or banner group.
b.	Provide multiple pre-set control switch with three to five preset positions.
c.	Provide multiple pre-set control switch with five to eight preset positions.
d.	Integrated Control System: Provide interface with integrated control system scheduled and as indicated.
L.	Fasteners and Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting hardware for wall mount, ceiling mount, and overhead strut suspension mount as scheduled or indicated.
M.	Fabrication:
1.	Provide factory-assembled units ready for installation, shipped with banners installed and ready to deploy.
2.	Seams: Where width of banner indicated exceeds maximum width produced without seams in material specified, provide banner with horizontal seam placed in location indicated on approved shop drawings.
2.6	ACOUSTICAL CLOUDS
A.	Basis of Design: DIVA Acoustical Clouds as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.	Acoustical Panel Sound Transmission: Provide third party test results indicating acoustical shell system comprised of acoustical shell panels have the following sound transmission requirements:
1.	Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 21 per ASTM E 413.
C.	Materials:
1.	Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063T alloy.
2.	Steel Tube: ASTM A 501, hot formed steel tubing.
3.	Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B.
4.	Veneer-Faced Panel Products (MDF core): Meets all CARB-2 requirements for formaldehyde emissions.
5.	Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered - formaldehyde free.
6.	High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 
a.	HPDL with urea formaldehyde-free adhesive.
D.	Acoustical Cloud Panels: Manufacturer's standard stressed-skin composite acoustical cloud panels, with STC meeting performance requirements, designed to mix and blend sound and reflect a maximum range of audible frequencies to audience.
1.	Core: 1-1/2 inches thick (38 mm) honeycomb core material shall have an open geometric pattern with cell walls vertical to panel skins and defined by alternating straight and sine wave layers.  Height of sine wave shall be 1/2 inch, wall thickness shall correspond to 60 lb kraft. Bonding of core material to panel faces shall be with permanently cured urethane adhesive.  Foam core materials and contact adhesives shall not be permitted.
2.	Face, Wood Veneer-Faced Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick hardwood plywood-faced medium density fiberboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 22.
3.	Face, Wilsonart High Pressure Plastic Laminate-Faced Panel: Material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 21.
4.	Face, Sherwin Williams Kem Aqua Painted Panel: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 22.
5.	Back: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, painted black.
6.	Panel Edge Frame: Straight panel edges are reinforced with extruded aluminum edge frame.
7.	Acclimate panel face and back materials in a temperature and humidity controlled environment for a minimum of 72 continuous hours so that they reach appropriate equilibrate condition prior to lamination to improve dimensional stability of finished laminated panels.
a.	Documentation of specified process must be available for review. 
E.	Overhead Sound Reflecting Acoustical Cloud: Acoustical cloud panels suspended directly from overhead supports.
1.	Cloud Panel Radius: 5 foot (1.52 m).
2.	Cloud Panel Radius: 10 foot (3.05 m).
3.	Cloud Panel Radius: 20 foot (6.09 m).
4.	Cloud Panel Radius: As indicated.
5.	Cloud Panel Size and Configuration: As indicated.
6.	Cloud Panel Face Finish:
a.	Hardwood Plywood Veneer: Plain sliced, slip-matched and balance matched to maintain a uniform leaf width across the full width of the panel.
1)	Veneer must be a minimum of 80+ or 85+ grade. Grade A veneer, or veneer of a lesser grade, is not acceptable.
2)	Sort veneer by grain density, grain structure, and color.
3)	Clip around character marks to minimize pin knots, mineral, gum, sap, and color variation.
4)	Individually clip and hand splice each veneer leaf with the grain cathedrals centered in the middle of each leaf. Veneer leaves with grain cathedrals not centered shall be rejected as unacceptable for the Work of this Section.
5)	Species: White oak.
6)	Species: Red oak.
7)	Species: White birch.
8)	Species: Maple.
9)	Species: Cherry.
b.	Wood Finish:  Transparent finish, stain color as selected by Architect
c.	Wilsonart High Pressure Plastic Laminate: Color as selected by Architect.
d.	Sherwin Williams Kem Aqua Painted Hardboard: Color as selected by Architect.
F.	Cloud Suspension: Shackle from each of four corners to overhead supports.
G.	Miscellaneous Supports: Battens, channels, and other miscellaneous supports are part of the work of Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
H.	Acoustical Cloud Installation Accessories: 
1.	Shackles: Rated screw pin shackles.
I.	Finishes:
1.	Aluminum Framing: Painted.
2.	Painted Finish for Acoustical Cloud Panel: Sherwin Williams Kem Aqua Paint.
3.	Transparent Wood Finish for Acoustical Cloud Panel Face: Manufacturer's standard, comparable to AWI custom grade acrylic lacquer.
2.7	ACOUSTICAL SHELLS (DIVA)
A.	Basis of Design: DIVA Acoustical Shells as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Full stage acoustical shell system consisting of mobile acoustical shell towers and adjustable acoustical shell ceiling.
B.	Materials:
1.	Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063T alloy.
2.	Steel Tube: ASTM A 501, hot formed steel tubing.
3.	Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B.
4.	Veneer-Faced Panel Products (MDF core): Meets all CARB-2 requirements for formaldehyde emissions.
5.	Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered - formaldehyde free.
6.	High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 
a.	HPDL with urea formaldehyde-free adhesive.
C.	Acoustical Panel Sound Transmission: Provide third party test results indicating acoustical shell system comprised of acoustical shell panels have the following sound transmission requirements:
1.	Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 21 per ASTM E 413.
D.	Acoustical Shell Panels, General: Manufacturer's standard stressed-skin composite acoustical shell panels, with a minimum of STC 21 to meet performance requirements, designed to mix and blend sound and reflect a maximum range of audible frequencies to both audience and performers. 
1.	Core; 1-1/2 inches thick (38 mm) honeycomb core material shall have an open geometric pattern with cell walls vertical to panel skins and defined by alternating straight and sine wave layers. Height of sine wave shall be 1/2 inch (12.7mm), wall thickness , not less than 60 lb kraft. Bonding of core material to panel faces shall be with permanently cured urethane adhesive. Foam core materials and contact adhesives shall not be permitted.
2.	Face, Wood Veneer-Faced Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick hardwood plywood-faced medium density fiberboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 22.
3.	Face, Wilsonart High Pressure Plastic Laminate-Faced Panel: Material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 21. 
4.	Face, Sherwin Williams Kem Aqua Painted Panel: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, material, and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 22.
5.	Back: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, painted black.
6.	Panel Edge Frame: Straight panel edges are reinforced with extruded aluminum edge frame.
7.	Acclimate panel face and back materials in a temperature and humidity controlled environment for a minimum of 72 continuous hours so that they reach appropriate equilibrate condition prior to lamination to improve dimensional stability of finished laminated panels.
a.	Documentation of specified process must be available for review. 
b.	Failure to provide documentation of required acclimation process upon request shall result in the rejection of the materials as suitable for the Work of this Section.
E.	Mobile Acoustical Towers: Free-standing, self-supporting, movable towers for stage back and side walls. Towers consist of acoustical shell panels in rigid, diagonally-braced vertical aluminum frame with formed steel base, with center panel and two hinged wing panels, in nesting configuration minimizing required storage space. Wing panel on tower equipped with latching hardware and stage access door where indicated. Counterweighted tower base with adjustable front leveling pads concealed by removable access panel.
1.	Tower Size: As indicated on project drawings.
2.	Tower Height and Width: As indicated on project drawings.
3.	Tower Panel Face Finish:
a.	Hardwood Plywood Veneer: Plain sliced, slip-matched and balance matched to maintain a uniform leaf width across the full width of the panel.
1)	Veneer must be a minimum of 80 grade or greater. 
a)	Grade A veneer, or any other veneer of a lesser grade, shall not be acceptable.
2)	Sort veneer by grain density, grain structure, and color.
3)	Clip around character marks to minimize pin knots, mineral, gum, sap, and color variation.
4)	Individually clip and hand splice each veneer leaf with the grain cathedrals centered in the middle of each leaf. Veneer leaves with grain cathedrals not centered shall be rejected as unacceptable for the Work of this Section.
5)	Species:  White oak.
6)	Species:  Red oak. 
7)	Species:  White birch. 
8)	Species:  Maple. 
9)	Species:  Cherry. 
10)	Species:  Custom, as selected by Architect. 
b.	Wood Veneer Finish:  Transparent finish, stain color as selected by Architect.
4.	Door and Wing Panel Hardware:
a.	Hinges: extruded from high-strength aluminum with a seamless barrel and integral attachment flange; hinge loads are carried by maintenance free, self-lubricating sintered bronze bearings which pivot on a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) diameter steel pin that are designed for silent operation and requiring no replacement parts. Metal-on-metal hinges without self-lubricating materials shall not be accepted.
b.	Slide-lock mechanism, pull handle, and adjustable wing stay.
5.	Tower Frame:
a.	Extruded 6063 T6 aluminum alloy vertical tower frames with welded cross tube assemblies.
6.	Stage Tower Transporter: 
a.	Type: Wheeled mover will be a one stroke lifting design using mechanical leverage to lift the tower. The wheeled mover must incorporate casters that are a minimum of 6 inches (205 mm) in diameter. A wheeled mover requiring a hydraulic pump or a battery operated motor to lift the tower will not be accepted. 
b.	Type: Air transporter configured to fit stage tower base and enable movement of towers through pneumatic cushion supporting majority (approximately 75 percent) of the tower's weight. 
F.	Adjustable Acoustical Shell Ceiling: Acoustical shell ceiling consisting of adjustable-angle acoustical shell ceiling panels supported by integral extruded aluminum truss, suspended from stage rigging pipe batten, and stored in fly-loft in vertical position. 
1.	Ceiling Panel Size and Configuration: As indicated on the project Drawings.
2.	Ceiling Panel Radius: 10 foot (3.05 m).
3.	Ceiling Hinges: Aluminum, with self-lubricating polymer bearings that are designed for silent operation. Metal on metal hinges without self-lubricating materials shall not be accepted.
4.	Integral Truss: Extruded 6063 T6 aluminum alloy. An integral truss is required to keep the ceiling row assembly straight and true. A truss is required to keep the pivoting hinges in line with each other to prevent binding and undue wear when rotating the ceiling row assembly to and from the performance position. A ceiling design without an integral truss shall not be accepted.
5.	Electrical system incorporating junction box(es) and associated cabling to distribute power and control signals to integrated lighting. System shall have UL or ETL classification. Any system without UL or ETL classification shall not be accepted.
6.	A tilt switch is provided to prevent accidental activation when the ceiling row is in the storage position.
7.	Hanger Arms
a.	The integral truss provides the structure to allow 1 inch (25 mm) square 11 gauge steel hanger arms to be located next to the rigging cables which is the strongest point to support the weight of the ceiling assembly. Hanger arms that are located more than 2 inches (25 mm) from the rigging cables are not acceptable. 
8.	Ceiling Performance Angle Adjustment:
a.	Spring-loaded steel tube assembly allows the ceiling to be easily locked into the performance position. The stay assembly shall be easily readjusted and marked to identify preferred preset angles. 
G.	Integrated LED Light Fixture: The fixture shall be the Lieto Acoustic Shell Fixture by the Wenger Corporation, headquartered at 555 Park Drive Owatonna, Minnesota 55060.
1.	No known equal. If providing alternate fixture for approval, submit a proposed fixture layout and photometric point by point calculations generated by an industry accepted computer modeling platform e.g. AGI32 that demonstrates a minimum of 100 foot candles and a uniformity ratio no greater than 3:1 (Max:Min) within the shell for review in accordance with Division 01 procedures. 
a.	Orchestra Shell lighting fixture models requiring quantities of fixtures in excess of the quantity indicated on the project drawings in order to develop any of the specified photometric performance criteria shall not be accepted.
2.	The orchestra shell manufacturer shall provide and install lighting required by this section based on its photometric performance, the required characteristics of the lighting fixtures and other features of the installation including interconnections and all requirements as expressed herein.   
3.	The shell manufacturer shall determine the model, quantity and layout of the lighting fixtures required to satisfactorily accomplish and achieve all of the design criteria required herein and include costs for the provision and installation of the requisite bill of materials in their bid for the Work of this Section. 
4.	All orchestra shell lighting scope described herein shall be completed by the orchestra shell manufacturer for a complete and operating system. 
H.	Lighting Layout:  
1.	Ceiling panels shall include integral, recessed lighting fixtures with attributes as specified below that appropriately spaced across each ceiling row and interconnected providing power and control to each individual lighting fixture. 
2.	The provided array of Orchestra Shell lighting fixtures shall combine to create a uniform, diffuse distribution of lighting across the entirety of the performance area below that is defined as that located within the footprint of the orchestra shell enclosure. 
I.	Lighting Fixture Attributes: 
1.	Individual lighting fixtures shall provide the following features and performance characteristics: 
a.	Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3000 degrees Kelvin. 
b.	Color Rendering Index (CRI): 80. 
c.	Minimum Rated LED Life (L70): 70,000 Hours. 
d.	Cooling Fans: Not Allowed. 
e.	Noise Criteria (maximum allowed): NC-17. 
2.	Fixtures must be designed so that they can be independently aimed from below the ceiling panel without requiring the use of tools.  The fixture�s total adjustable three-axis range of motion shall be a minimum of 30 degrees. 
3.	Fixtures shall be available with trim rings on the face side of the panels for a clean installation and to shield, cover and limit visibility around the fixture. 
4.	Fixtures shall use DMX512 (ANSI E1.11) controlled drivers that dim smoothly to 1 percent light output without visible stepping, flash or flicker. 
5.	Fixtures shall include RJ45 connector(s) or 5-pin XLR connector(s) supporting the input/output (daisy-chain) connection of DMX512 lighting control system protocol. 
6.	Fixtures shall include Powercon style twist-lock connector(s) supporting the input/output (daisy-chain) connection of electrical power. 
7.	Fixtures shall be individually addressable using - Remote Device Management (RDM - ANSI E1.20) control standards.  Fixtures shall maintain all RDM connection and functionality regardless of whether fixtures are in their �playing� position (horizontal orientation) or �storage� position (vertical orientation.) 
8.	Fixtures shall produce an even beam of light, uniformly spread throughout the field. 
9.	Fixtures shall be available in models that produce symmetrical and asymmetrical beam spread patterns. 
10.	Fixtures proposed for the Work of this Section shall be available with IES format photometric files associated with each fixture model proposed for use herein.  IES files can be used in lighting fixture performance computer modeling and analysis software such as AGI32 to demonstrate that the lighting performance meets the design criteria required herein. 
11.	Fixtures proposed for the Work of this Section shall be submitted for third-party, independent testing laboratory characterization and quantification of the fixture�s relative sound pressure levels during normal operation.  Include printed lighting fixture product data with the stated Noise Criteria (NC) level of the tested fixture as part of submittal process. 
12.	Fixtures shall produce no Ultra-Violet (UV) or Infra-Red (IR) radiation or Radio Frequency Interference (RFI.) 
13.	Fixtures shall be flicker free and suitable for use with video. 
14.	Fixtures shall be individually listed as a �Directly Controlled Luminaire� for use with UL 924 Emergency Lighting Control. 
15.	Fixtures shall include a safety cable. 
16.	Fixture depth shall be minimal such that the presence of the lighting fixture(s) does not increase the stored depth of the ceiling row. 
17.	Fixtures shall be available with optional glare control accessories including concentric ring louver, hexcel style �egg-crate� louver and homogenizing lens. 
18.	Fixtures shall be listed, carry the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory and shall be RoHS compliant. 
19.	Fixtures pre-approved as meeting the �Basis of Design� criteria established herein for the orchestra shell lighting fixtures shall be the Lieto manufactured by the Wenger Corporation. 
a.	Requests for substitutions associated with other lighting fixtures shall be submitted no less than 10 days before the scheduled bid date and shall be considered based on the following criteria and submitted data:  
1)	Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets associated with each product to be included. 
2)	Test results from certified independent testing laboratory indicating compliance with performance requirements required herein. 
3)	Maintenance instructions and recommendations. 
4)	Acoustical testing data from a certified independent testing laboratory demonstrating minimal compliance with required acoustical performance  
5)	Photometric Analysis Document as indicated in paragraph D.3., below 
6)	Sample warranty 
b.	Approval of substitution requests shall be solely indicated by issuance of written Addendum. 
J.	Lighting Performance: 
1.	Photometric Performance: 
a.	A minimum intensity level 100 foot-candles* *average illuminance measured 30 inches (762 mm) above the stage floor. 
b.	Uniformity ratio (max:min):  Less than 3.0:1. 
c.	Uniformity ratio (avg:min):  Less than 2.5:1. 
2.	Each fixture shall be located and aimed so as to minimize light �scalloping� on the tower walls. 
3.	Photometric Analysis Document: 
a.	The photometric performance of the lighting produced by the shell manufacturer�s proposed lighting system shall be computer modeled and submitted for the review and approval of the specifier as part of the shop drawing submittal process.  The purpose of the submitted analysis is to demonstrate that the manufacturer�s quantity and layout of selected lighting fixtures complies with each of the specific photometric requirements called out herein.  The computer modeling shall be performed using commercially available lighting analysis software such as AGI32. 
b.	Include at least the following information in the submitted �point-by-point� photometric analysis document: 
1)	Lighting Fixture Schedule - Lighting fixture description including fixture manufacturer, fixture model, output wattage, beam spread, lumens produced, produced CCT and CRI, accessories, IES filename, Light Loss Factor (LLF) setting. 
2)	Calculation Summary - including: 
a)	Average Illuminance in Footcandles. 
b)	Maximum Illuminance in Footcandles. 
c)	Minimum Illuminance in Footcandles. 
d)	Uniformity ratio (max:min). 
e)	Uniformity ratio (avg:min). 
3)	Iso contour lines set at 10 footcandle increments across the entire range of lighting studied in the analysis document. 
4)	Calculation grid at 30 inches (762 mm) above the finished floor (a.f.f.) with calculation points spaced at increments no greater than 5 feet (1524 mm). 
5)	The manufacturer, product name and revision number of the software used to create the analysis document. 
6)	Date completed and identification of the software operator/technician responsible for the preparation of the analysis document. 
K.	Control, Wiring and Interconnections: 
1.	Each fixture shall be equipped with an integral, electronic tilt switch that shall maintain all RDM connection and functionality at all times regardless of whether fixtures are in their �playing� position (horizontal orientation) or �storage� position (vertical orientation.) 
2.	Lighting Control System Data Cabling (DMX512): 
a.	DMX512 lighting control system data cables shall be provided by the shell manufacturer to facilitate the interface of the orchestra shell lighting with the stage lighting system infrastructure.   
b.	DMX512 lighting control system cabling to the ceiling row (provided under another Section) shall be by a theatrically rigged connection direct to the first lighting fixture in that ceiling panel�s row. 
c.	Orchestra shell manufacturers shall provide DMX512 control data system jumper cables of required length(s) using the fixtures� RJ45 or 5-Pin XLR connectors to daisy-chain control to each of the panel�s orchestra shell lighting fixtures.   
d.	Fixtures shall be provided with on-board, software selectable, 120 ohm, DMX512 terminator resistor capability.  
e.	Secure, dress and organize all data cables to ensure that they do not snag or catch adjacent rigging equipment, scenery and draperies. 
3.	Electrical Power: 
a.	Each ceiling panel�s lighting fixture array shall receive its power (provided under another Section) via a theatrically rigged, �strain-relieved� connection terminated at the ceiling panel�s junction box. 
b.	Jumper cables with PowerCon style connectors shall be used to daisy-chain supply of electrical power from the junction box to each fixture in turn, on the ceiling panel.  
c.	Organize, secure and dress all power cables to ensure that they do not snag or catch adjacent rigging equipment, scenery and drapery.  
4.	Warranty:
a.	The fixture shall carry a five-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty coverage shall commence at project "acceptance," not with factory shipment. See the Wenger warranty card for service contact information, specifics and Integrated Lighting: Manufacturer's standard UL-approved fixtures located as indicated.
L.	Stage Rigging and Battens: Rigging and battens supporting an acoustical shell ceiling are part of the work of stage curtains, specified elsewhere in this Section.
M.	Miscellaneous Supports: Channels, and other miscellaneous supports are part of the work of Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
N.	Finishes:
1.	Aluminum Framing: Mill finish.
2.	Steel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply thermosetting TGIC polyester powder coating.
3.	Opaque Painted Finish for Acoustical Shell Panel: 100 percent acrylic latex, 2-coat, eggshell finish. 
4.	Transparent Wood Finish for Acoustical Shell Panel Face: Manufacturer's standard finish, comparable to AWI custom grade acrylic lacquer. 
2.8	ACOUSTICAL SHELLS (MAESTRO)
A.	Basis of Design: Maestro Acoustical Shells as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Full stage acoustical shell system consisting of mobile acoustical shell towers and adjustable acoustical shell ceiling.
B.	Materials:
1.	Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063T alloy.
2.	Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, hot formed steel tubing.
3.	Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B.
4.	LPL (Low pressure laminate) Thermally fused polyester resin impregnated paper.
5.	Veneer-Faced Panel Products (MDF core): Meets all CARB-2 requirements for formaldehyde emissions.
6.	Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered - formaldehyde free.
7.	Thermally-fused polyester surfacing that meets performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 for VGS grade.
8.	High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
a.	HPDL with urea formaldehyde-free adhesive.
C.	Acoustical Panel Sound Transmission: Provide third party test results indicating acoustical shell system comprised of acoustical shell panels have the following sound transmission requirements:
1.	Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 20 per ASTM E 413.
D.	Acoustical Shell Panels, General: Manufacturer's standard stressed-skin composite acoustical shell panels, with a minimum of STC 20 to meet performance requirements, designed to mix and blend sound and reflect a maximum range of audible frequencies to both audience and performers.
1.	Core; 1-1/2 inches thick (38 mm) honeycomb core material shall have an open geometric pattern with cell walls vertical to panel skins and defined by alternating straight and sine wave layers. Height of sine wave shall be 1/2 inch; wall thickness shall correspond to 60 lb. kraft. Bonding of core material to panel faces shall be with permanently cured formaldehyde free urethane adhesive. Foam core materials and contact adhesives shall not be permitted.
2.	Face, Low Pressure Laminate Panel: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin with a thermally-fused polyester surfacing. Material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 20.
3.	Face, Wilsonart High Pressure Plastic Laminate-Faced Panel: Material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 20.
4.	Face, Sherwin Williams Kem Aqua Painted Panel: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 20.
5.	Face, Wood Veneer-Faced Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick hardwood plywood-faced medium density fiberboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 21.
6.	Back: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, black.
7.	Panel Edge Frame: Straight panel edges are reinforced with extruded aluminum edge frame.
8.	Acclimate panel face and back materials in a temperature and humidity controlled environment so that they reach appropriate equilibrium condition prior to lamination to improve dimensional stability of finished laminated panels.
a.	Documentation of specified process must be available for review.
E.	Mobile Acoustical Towers: Free-standing, self-supporting, movable towers for stage back and side walls. Towers consist of acoustical shell panels in rigid, diagonally-braced vertical steel frame, with center panel and two hinged wing panels, in nesting configuration minimizing required storage space. Wing panel on tower equipped with latching hardware and stage access door where indicated. Counterweighted tower base with adjustable front leveling pads concealed by removable access panel.
1.	Tower Size: 12 foot (3660 mm) wide or 10 foot (3050 mm) wide; consisting of one 4 foot (1220 mm) center panel and two 4 foot (1220 mm) wing panels; or one 4 foot (1220 mm) center panel and two 3 foot (914 mm) wing panels for the 10' option.
2.	Tower Panel Radius: 8 foot (2438 mm).
3.	Tower Panel Face Finish:
a.	LPL - Thermally fused polyester resin impregnated paper.
b.	Painted. 
c.	High-pressure laminate. 
d.	Wood veneer.
4.	Door and Wing Panel Hardware:
a.	Hinges: steel tube with self-lubricating sintered bronze bearings which pivot on a 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter steel pin that are designed for silent operation and requiring no replacement parts. Metal-on-metal hinges without self-lubricating materials on towers are not acceptable.
b.	Slide-lock mechanism, pull handle, and adjustable wing stay.
5.	Tower Frame:
a.	Tubular steel vertical tower frames with welded steel structure.
6.	Stage Tower Transporter: Wheeled mover shall be a one stroke lifting design using mechanical leverage to lift the tower. The wheeled mover shall incorporate casters that are a minimum of 6" in diameter. A wheeled mover requiring a hydraulic pump shall not be accepted.
F.	Adjustable Acoustical Shell Ceiling: Acoustical shell ceiling consisting of adjustable-angle acoustical shell ceiling panels supported by integral steel frame, suspended from stage rigging pipe batten, and stored in fly-loft in vertical position.
1.	Ceiling Panel Size and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
2.	Ceiling Panel Radius: 10 foot (3050 mm).
3.	Hanger Arms:
a.	The integral steel frame provides the structure to allow 1 inch (25 mm) square, 11 gauge steel hanger arms to be located next to the stage rigging cables, which is the strongest point to support the weight of the ceiling assembly. Hanger arms that are located more than 2 inches (25 mm) from the rigging cables are not acceptable.
4.	Ceiling Performance Angle Adjustment:
a.	Poly strap with adjustable length allows the ceiling to be easily set into the performance position. The strap is adjustable to preferred angles in approximately 1 degree increments from 0 to 45 degrees.
G.	Integrated LED Light Fixture: The fixture shall be the Lieto Acoustic Shell Fixture by the Wenger Corporation, headquartered at 555 Park Drive Owatonna, Minnesota 55060;
1.	No known equal. If providing alternate fixture for approval, submit a proposed fixture layout and photometric point by point calculations generated by an industry accepted computer modeling platform e.g. AGI32 that demonstrates a minimum of 100 foot candles and a uniformity ratio no greater than 3:1 (Max:Min) within the shell for review in accordance with Division 01 procedures.
a.	Orchestra Shell lighting fixture models requiring quantities of fixtures in excess of the quantity indicated on the project drawings in order to develop any of the specified photometric performance criteria shall not be accepted.  
2.	The orchestra shell manufacturer shall provide and install lighting required by this section based on its photometric performance, the required characteristics of the lighting fixtures and other features of the installation including interconnections and all requirements as expressed herein.
3.	The shell manufacturer shall determine the model, quantity and layout of the lighting fixtures required to satisfactorily accomplish and achieve all of the design criteria required herein and include costs for the provision and installation of the requisite bill of materials in their bid for the Work of this Section.
4.	All orchestra shell lighting scope described herein shall be completed by the orchestra shell manufacturer for a complete and operating system.
H.	Lighting Layout: 
1.	Ceiling panels shall include integral, recessed lighting fixtures with attributes as specified below that appropriately spaced across each ceiling row and interconnected providing power and control to each individual lighting fixture.  
2.	The provided array of Orchestra Shell lighting fixtures shall combine to create a uniform, diffuse distribution of lighting across the entirety of the performance area below that is defined as that located within the footprint of the orchestra shell enclosure.
I.	Lighting Fixture Attributes:
1.	Individual lighting fixtures shall provide the following features and performance characteristics:
a.	Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3000 degrees Kelvin.
b.	Color Rendering Index (CRI): 80.
c.	Minimum Rated LED Life (L70): 70,000 Hours.
d.	Cooling Fans: Not Allowed.
e.	Noise Criteria (maximum allowed): NC-17.
2.	Fixtures must be designed so that they can be independently aimed from below the ceiling panel without requiring the use of tools.  The fixture�s total adjustable three-axis range of motion shall be a minimum of 30 degrees
3.	Fixtures shall be available with trim rings on the face side of the panels for a clean installation and to shield, cover and limit visibility around the fixture.
4.	Fixtures shall use DMX512 (ANSI E1.11) controlled drivers that dim smoothly to 1 percent light output without visible stepping, flash or flicker.
5.	Fixtures shall include RJ45 connector(s) or 5-pin XLR connector(s) supporting the input/output (daisy-chain) connection of DMX512 lighting control system protocol.
6.	Fixtures shall include Powercon style twist-lock connector(s) supporting the input/output (daisy-chain) connection of electrical power.
7.	Fixtures shall be individually addressable using - Remote Device Management (RDM - ANSI E1.20) control standards.  Fixtures shall maintain all RDM connection and functionality regardless of whether fixtures are in their �playing� position (horizontal orientation) or �storage� position (vertical orientation.)
8.	Fixtures shall produce an even beam of light, uniformly spread throughout the field.
9.	Fixtures shall be available in models that produce symmetrical and asymmetrical beam spread patterns.
10.	Fixtures proposed for the Work of this Section shall be available with IES format photometric files associated with each fixture model proposed for use herein.  IES files can be used in lighting fixture performance computer modeling and analysis software such as AGI32 to demonstrate that the lighting performance meets the design criteria required herein.
11.	Fixtures proposed for the Work of this Section shall be submitted for third-party, independent testing laboratory characterization and quantification of the fixture�s relative sound pressure levels during normal operation.  Include printed lighting fixture product data with the stated Noise Criteria (NC) level of the tested fixture as part of submittal process.
12.	Fixtures shall produce no Ultra-Violet (UV) or Infra-Red (IR) radiation or Radio Frequency Interference (RFI.)
13.	Fixtures shall be flicker free and suitable for use with video.
14.	Fixtures shall be individually listed as a �Directly Controlled Luminaire� for use with UL 924 Emergency Lighting Control.
15.	Fixtures shall include a safety cable.
16.	Fixture depth shall be minimal such that the presence of the lighting fixture(s) does not increase the stored depth of the ceiling row.
17.	Fixtures shall be available with optional glare control accessories including concentric ring louver, hexcel style �egg-crate� louver and homogenizing lens.
18.	Fixtures shall be listed, carry the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory and shall be RoHS compliant.
19.	Fixtures pre-approved as meeting the �Basis of Design� criteria established herein for the orchestra shell lighting fixtures shall be the Lieto manufactured by the Wenger Corporation.
a.	Requests for substitutions associated with other lighting fixtures shall be submitted no less than 10 days before the scheduled bid date and shall be considered based on the following criteria and submitted data:
1)	Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets associated with each product to be included.
2)	Test results from certified independent testing laboratory indicating compliance with performance requirements required herein.
3)	Maintenance instructions and recommendations.
4)	Acoustical testing data from a certified independent testing laboratory demonstrating minimal compliance with required acoustical performance 
5)	Photometric Analysis Document as indicated in paragraph D.3., below
6)	Sample warranty
b.	Approval of substitution requests shall be solely indicated by issuance of written Addendum.
J.	Lighting Performance:
1.	Photometric Performance:
a.	A minimum intensity level 100 foot-candles* *average illuminance measured 30 inches (762 mm) above the stage floor.
b.	Uniformity ratio (max:min):  Less than 3.0:1.
c.	Uniformity ratio (avg:min):  Less than 2.5:1.
2.	Each fixture shall be located and aimed so as to minimize light �scalloping� on the tower walls.
3.	Photometric Analysis Document:
a.	The photometric performance of the lighting produced by the shell manufacturer�s proposed lighting system shall be computer modeled and submitted for the review and approval of the specifier as part of the shop drawing submittal process.  The purpose of the submitted analysis is to demonstrate that the manufacturer�s quantity and layout of selected lighting fixtures complies with each of the specific photometric requirements called out herein.  The computer modeling shall be performed using commercially available lighting analysis software such as AGI32.
b.	Include at least the following information in the submitted �point-by-point� photometric analysis document:
1)	Lighting Fixture Schedule - Lighting fixture description including fixture manufacturer, fixture model, output wattage, beam spread, lumens produced, produced CCT and CRI, accessories, IES filename, Light Loss Factor (LLF) setting.
2)	Calculation Summary - including:
a)	Average Illuminance in Footcandles. 
b)	Maximum Illuminance in Footcandles. 
c)	Minimum Illuminance in Footcandles. 
d)	Uniformity ratio (max:min). 
e)	Uniformity ratio (avg:min). 
3)	Iso contour lines set at 10 footcandle increments across the entire range of lighting studied in the analysis document.
4)	Calculation grid at 30 inches (762 mm) above the finished floor (a.f.f.) with calculation points spaced at increments no greater than 5 feet (1524 mm). 
5)	The manufacturer, product name and revision number of the software used to create the analysis document. 
6)	Date completed and identification of the software operator/technician responsible for the preparation of the analysis document. 
K.	Control, Wiring and Interconnections: 
1.	Each fixture shall be equipped with an integral, electronic tilt switch that shall maintain all RDM connection and functionality at all times regardless of whether fixtures are in their �playing� position (horizontal orientation) or �storage� position (vertical orientation.) 
2.	Lighting Control System Data Cabling (DMX512): 
a.	DMX512 lighting control system data cables shall be provided by the shell manufacturer to facilitate the interface of the orchestra shell lighting with the stage lighting system infrastructure.   
b.	DMX512 lighting control system cabling to the ceiling row (provided under another Section) shall be by a theatrically rigged connection direct to the first lighting fixture in that ceiling panel�s row. 
c.	Orchestra shell manufacturers shall provide DMX512 control data system jumper cables of required length(s) using the fixtures� RJ45 or 5-Pin XLR connectors to daisy-chain control to each of the panel�s orchestra shell lighting fixtures.   
d.	Fixtures shall be provided with on-board, software selectable, 120 ohm, DMX512 terminator resistor capability.  
e.	Secure, dress and organize all data cables to ensure that they do not snag or catch adjacent rigging equipment, scenery and draperies. 
3.	Electrical Power: 
a.	Each ceiling panel�s lighting fixture array shall receive its power (provided under another Section) via a theatrically rigged, �strain-relieved� connection terminated at the ceiling panel�s junction box. 
b.	Jumper cables with PowerCon style connectors shall be used to daisy-chain supply of electrical power from the junction box to each fixture in turn, on the ceiling panel. 
c.	Organize, secure and dress all power cables to ensure that they do not snag or catch adjacent rigging equipment, scenery and drapery. 
4.	Warranty: 
a.	The fixture shall carry a five-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty coverage shall commence at project �acceptance,� not with factory shipment. See the Wenger warranty card for service contact information, specifics and Integrated Lighting: Manufacturer's standard UL-approved fixtures located as indicated.
L.	Stage Rigging and Battens: Rigging and battens supporting acoustical shell ceiling are part of the work of stage curtains, specified elsewhere in this Section.
M.	Miscellaneous Supports: Channels, and other miscellaneous supports are part of the work of Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
N.	Finishes:
1.	Steel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply thermosetting TGIC polyester powder coating or wet paint.
2.	Opaque Painted Finish for Acoustical Shell Panel: 100 percent acrylic latex, 2-coat, eggshell finish.
3.	Transparent Wood Finish for Acoustical Shell Panel Face: Manufacturer's standard finish, comparable to AWI custom grade acrylic lacquer.
2.9	ACOUSTICAL SHELLS (LEGACY CLASSIC) 
A.	Basis of Design: Legacy Classic Acoustical Shells as manufactured by Wenger Corporation; mobile acoustical towers. 
B.	Materials: 
1.	Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063T alloy. 
2.	Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, hot formed steel tubing. 
3.	Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered - urea formaldehyde free. 
4.	High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 
a.	HPDL with urea formaldehyde-free adhesive. 
C.	Acoustical Shell Panels: Manufacturer's standard stressed-skin composite acoustical shell panels, designed to mix and blend sound and reflect a maximum range of audible frequencies to both audience and performers. 
1.	Core: 3/4-inch (19-mm) thick honeycomb, resin-impregnated, bonded to frame and faces with permanent urethane adhesive.  Contact cement adhesive does not meet the requirements of this specification. 
2.	Face, Painted Panel: 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. 
3.	Back: 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin. 
4.	Panel Edge Frame: Extruded aluminum edge angle, along straight edges. 
D.	Mobile Acoustical Towers: Free-standing, self-supporting, movable towers for stage back and side walls. Towers consist of acoustical shell panels with rigid steel frame in nesting configuration. Counterweighted tower base, painted oyster, with non-marring casters. 
1.	Size: 6 feet (1829 mm) wide. 
2.	Height: 15 feet 2 inches (4623 mm). 
3.	Canopy Angle: Canopy may be set at 45, 60, 75 and 90 degree angles. Canopy tool included to raise and lower canopy. 
4.	Kicker Panel: Hinged to bottom of lower panel and folds flat for storage. 
5.	Lift Mechanism: Pulley design lift assisted mechanism raises and lowers shell in just 6 turns with the use of a handle. 
6.	Tower Panel Face Finish: Laminated Hardboard: [Match Architect�s sample]. 
7.	Tower Storage: Towers nest for maximum space utilization. 
E.	Adjustable Acoustical Shell Ceiling: Acoustical shell ceiling consisting of adjustable-angle acoustical shell ceiling panels, suspended from stage rigging pipe batten, and stored in fly-loft in vertical position. 
1.	Size and Configuration: As indicated. 
2.	Radius: 10 feet (3050 mm). 
3.	Panel Face Finish: 
a.	Painted Hardboard: Match Architect's sample. 
b.	Plastic Laminate: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer�s available wood grain patterns. 
4.	Panel Hinges: Self-lubricating ABS bushings and steel framework. 
F.	Integrated Lighting: Manufacturer's standard UL-approved fixtures located as indicated. Exposed wire harness. 
G.	Stage Rigging and Battens: Rigging and battens supporting acoustical shell ceiling are specified in Division 11 Section "Stage Curtains." 
H.	Miscellaneous Supports: Battens, channels, and other miscellaneous supports are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." 
I.	Electrical Wiring: Wiring of integral light fixtures is specified in Division 26 wiring sections. 
J.	Finishes: 
1.	Steel Framing: Powder coat painted finish, black. 
2.	Low Pressure Thermofused Acoustical Shell Panel: Polyester decorative finishes. 
2.10	ACOUSTIC TOWER (LEGACY SELECT ACOUSTIC TOWER)
A.	Basis of Design: Legacy Select Acoustic Tower as manufactured by Wenger Corporation; mobile acoustical towers. 
B.	Materials: 
1.	Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063T alloy. 
2.	Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, hot formed steel tubing 
3.	Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered - urea formaldehyde free. 
4.	High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 
a.	HPDL with urea formaldehyde-free adhesive. 
C.	Acoustical Shell Panels: Manufacturer's standard stressed-skin composite acoustical shell panels, designed to mix and blend sound and reflect a maximum range of audible frequencies to both audience and performers. 
1.	Core: 3/4-inch (19-mm) thick honeycomb, resin-impregnated, bonded to frame and faces with permanent urethane adhesive. Contact cement adhesive does not meet the requirements of this specification. 
2.	Face, Painted Panel: 3/16-inch (5-mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. 
3.	Back: 3/16-inch (5-mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, painted black. 
4.	Panel Edge Frame: Extruded aluminum edge angle, along straight edges. 
D.	Mobile Acoustical Towers: Free-standing, self-supporting, movable towers. Towers consist of acoustical shell panels with rigid steel frame in nesting configuration. Tower is equipped with removable bottom filler panel that stores on back of tower. Counterweighted tower base, painted black, with non-marring casters. 
1.	Size: 6 feet (1829 mm) wide. 
2.	Height: 11 feet 6 inches (3505 mm). 
3.	Panel Radius: 10 feet (3050 mm). 
4.	Fabrication: Construct panels utilizing nested configuration and folding top to enable nested storage and passage of panel through 34 by 80 inch (864 by 2032 mm) door opening. Equip top panels with compression gas springs to support raising and lowering of panel. Include standard tools required to raise and lower panels. 
5.	Panel Face Finish: 
a.	Painted Hardboard: Match Architect's sample. 
b.	Plastic Laminate: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer�s available wood grain patterns. 
6.	Panel Hinges: Self-lubricating ABS bushings and steel framework.	 
E.	Finishes: 
1.	Steel Framing: Powder coat painted finish, black. 
2.	Opaque Painted Finish for Acoustical Shell Panel: 100 percent acrylic latex, 2-coat, matte finish. 
3.	Woodgrain Laminate: Selection of Wilson Art decorative laminates. 
2.11	STAGE TOWER TRANSPORTER 
A.	Wheeled Mover:  Single-stroke, lifting-design wheeled mover: 
1.	The wheeled Mover shall be designed to use mechanical leverage to lift the tower. 
2.	The wheeled mover shall incorporate tri-casters that are a minimum of 6 inches in diameter. 
3.	Wheeled movers requiring a hydraulic pump or a battery-operated motor to lift the tower shall not be accepted. 
B.	Air Transporter: 
1.	The air transporter shall be designed to enable the movement of the towers on a pneumatic cushion of air. 
2.	The air transporter shall be configured to fit the tower base. 
3.	The air transporter shall be designed to support (approximately) 75 percent of the tower�s weight. 
2.12	ORCHESTRA PIT FILLERS
A.	Orchestra pit fillers for:
1.	Stage level.
2.	Audience seating level.
3.	Floor level platform.
B.	Basis of Design: STRATA Platform, portable interlocking platform system with interchangeable, adjustable columns cross braced to independently supported platforms, with individually removable acoustically-isolated honeycomb panels, as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
C.	Structural Performance, Orchestra Pit Filler: 
1.	Uniform Live Load: 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kN/sq. m).
2.	Caster Load: 300 lb (136 kg) applied via 2 inch (51 mm) diameter by 2 inch (51 mm) wide flat rubber wheel with no appreciable surface deformation.
3.	Concentrated Load:  500 lb (227 kg) on a single 6 inch (152 mm) by 6 inch (152 mm) square area per deck.
4.	Anchoring: Pit filler to be secured to stagefront edge with approved manufacturer components. 
5.	Deflection:  Not exceeding L/360 at design live load for 72 inch (1829 mm) long panel and span.  Spans greater than 72 inches (1829 mm) result in larger deflections and do not meet L/360.
D.	Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" based upon seismic design criteria indicated.
E.	Materials:
1.	Aluminum:
a.	Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
b.	Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063-T6 alloy.
c.	Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429.
2.	Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
3.	Hardboard: AHA A135.4, tempered grade.
4.	Wood Stage Flooring: Refer to Division 09 Section "Wood Flooring."
F.	Framing Components:
1.	Main Support Beams: Extruded aluminum with dual fastener tracks for panel connection and adjustable beam-to-stage connection bracket fastened to stage using threaded insert and 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter threaded locking device.
2.	Cross Beams: Extruded aluminum with single fastener track for panel connection, attached to main support beams with pin and socket connection requiring no tools.
3.	Column Assemblies: Extruded aluminum, with pinned connection to main support beams and threaded leveling foot allowing total adjustment of 4 inches (102 mm), plus or minus.
4.	Bracing: Aluminum or steel, attached to main support beams and cross beams, with pinned connection to columns.
G.	Composite Panel Deck:
1.	Thickness:  3-5/8 inch (92 mm) overall.
2.	Panel faces: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) plyron with 1/8 inch (3 mm) tempered hardboard on face.
3.	Core: Phenolic impregnated paper honeycomb, 2-5/8 inch (67 mm) thick.
4.	Panel Edges: Extruded PVC, with glass-filled nylon corners.
5.	Panel Attachments: Integral spring-loaded screw assemblies.
6.	Traffic Surface: Hardboard, tempered, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
a.	Finish: Natural finish.
b.	Finish: Painted black.
c.	Finish: Tongued and grooved ready. Tongued and grooved to be supplied and field installed by others.
H.	Accessories:
1.	Storage and Transport Carts: Manufacturer's standard steel tube-framed transport carts configured for panel and frame components, with heavy-duty casters and clamping safety strap, configured deck units or framing members.
2.	Back Closure Panels: Perimeter closure panels matching horizontal surface, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick plywood, mounted to platform with clamps.
3.	Curtain Closures: Manufacturer's standard stage-drapery-fabric skirting closures with hanging accessories, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I.	Finishes:
1.	Metal Finishes:
a.	Aluminum: Mill finish.
b.	Steel: Powder-coated finish.
2.	Hardboard Opaque Finish: 100 percent acrylic paint, specially formulated for adhesion to hardboard surfaces, 2-coats (primer and topcoat), satin finish, black.
3.	Tongued and Grooved Flooring Finish: to be supplied and installed by others.
2.13	ORCHESTRA PIT FILLERS AND STAGE PLATFORMS
A.	Basis of Design: StageTek Platforms; portable stage platforms, seated risers, pit fillers and stage extensions as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.	Structural Performance Requirements as measured on a 4 feet by 8 feet (1219 mm X 2438 mm) rectangular deck:
1.	Stage Platforms and Risers:
a.	Standard Uniform Live Load for decks with 4 legs: 125 lbf/sq ft (6 kN/sq m), meets L/75 deflection criteria.
b.	Heavy Duty Uniform Live Load for decks with 5th leg (as needed or smaller deck): 150 lbf/sq ft (7.2 kN/sq m), meets L/180 deflection criteria.
c.	Heavy Duty Uniform Live Load, for decks with no 5th leg, added stiffener(s): 150 lbf/sq ft (7.2 kN/sq m), meets L/180 deflection criteria.
2.	Pit Fillers and Stage Extensions:
a.	Standard Uniform Live Load for decks with 5th leg (as needed or smaller deck): 150 lbf/sq ft (7.2 kN/sq m), meets L/180 deflection criteria.
b.	Standard Uniform Live Load, for decks with no 5th leg, added stiffener(s): 150 lbf/sq ft (7.2 kN/sq m), meets L/180 deflection criteria.
3.	Lateral Live Side Load:  12 lbf/sq ft (0.6 kN/sq m) based on deck top surface area, meets IBC code.
4.	Caster Load: 300 lb (136 Kg) applied via 2 inch (51 mm) diameter by 2 inch (51 mm) wide flat rubber wheel with no appreciable surface deformation.
5.	Concentrated Load:  500 lb (227 kg) on a single 6 inch (152 mm) by 6 inch (152 mm) square area per deck. 
6.	Anchoring: Pit filler to be secured to stagefront edge with approved manufacturer components. 
7.	Ledger Mount: Option available per project specific drawing using 4 or 5 legs. 
8.	Stage Decks: Fully replaceable components including corners, frame, and wood deck. Replaceable in the field with common tools. 
9.	Treads of Stairs: Uniform Load: 500 lb (227 Kg) per 36 inches x 11 inches (914 x 279 mm) tread, and concentrated load: 300 lb (136 Kg) on area of 12 sq in (7742 sq. mm): Total Uniform Load of 1,000 lb (454 Kg) per stair assembly. 
10.	Guard Rail Concentrated Load: 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied at any point in any direction. 
11.	Guard Rail Uniform Load: 50 lbf/ft (0.73 kN/m) applied to top rail. 
12.	Intermediate Rails, Panels, and Baluster Concentrated Load: 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied to 1 sq ft (0.093 sq. m) area. 
13.	Guard Rail In-Fill Panel compliant with IBC 4 inches (102 mm) sphere code.
C.	Materials:
1.	Aluminum: Complies with ASTM Standards listed above in section 1.3 C.
2.	Materials Meeting Sustainable Design Requirements:
a.	Provide stage platforms and risers made with products and adhesives that contain no added urea formaldehyde.
3.	Softwood Plywood: DOC APA PS1.
4.	Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Tempered Grade.
5.	Hardware and Fasteners:  Manufacturer's standard non-corroding type, permanently mounted to units, remaining set or tightened under load and vibration in service, and designed to preclude user contact with sharp edges.
D.	Frame: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum, 4 inches tall (102 mm), with hidden contours to accept attachments. Rounded 1.5 inches (38 mm) hand-hold area open to accept power-grip (closed-grip) around entire perimeter. Frame components are repairable and replaceable.
E.	Corners: Cast 380 aluminum corner assembly engages leg 3 inches (76.2 mm) and secures leg with a full-length 2.75 inches (69.85 mm) convex brace driven by a threaded bolt operated with a nylon t-handle. Corner assemblies are repairable and replaceable.
F.	Legs:  Legs operate individually and are constructed of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum round tube, 2.50 inches diameter (63.5 mm) with a wall thickness of .075 inch (1.905 mm).
1.	Custom Length Legs: Provide where required for layout indicated.
2.	Fixed Height Legs:  Provide where indicated.  Standard fixed-height legs available in 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, and 48 inches (200, 410, 610, 810, 1020 and 1220 mm) high, as required for layout indicated. Non-marking cap. Legs to store resting on frame rails or in clamping brackets within deck frames.
3.	Adjustable Legs: Provided where indicated. Legs provided with an adjustable threaded foot and jam nut for infinite adjustability plus or minus 2 inches (51 mm) from nominal length of leg. The foot shall provide a non-marking rubber pad.
4.	Telescoping Legs: Provide where indicated. Standard Telescoping Legs available in 3 configurations adjusting between 16 inches to 28 inches (406 mm to 711 mm), 24 inches to 40 inches (610 to 1016 mm), and 30 inches to 54 inches (762 to 1372 mm). Nominal height adjustment in increments of 4 inches (102 mm) secured with spring-loaded quick-release pin. Constructed of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum round outer tube, 2.50 by .075 inch (63.5 by 1.905 mm) telescoping over a 2 inches by 0.125 inch (50.8 by 3.17 mm) inner tube. With an adjustable threaded foot providing for fine adjustability between beyond nominal set length of leg. The foot shall provide a non-marking rubber pad. Inner and outer Tubes secured with non-rattling bushings and shall not pull apart from each other.
G.	Deck Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel construction, 3/4-inch (19-mm) overall thickness, consisting of minimum 1/2-inch (12-mm) thick plywood substrate with finish surfaces consisting of, edged with extruded aluminum:
1.	Finish: 1/8 inch (3 mm) tempered hardboard, with natural top surface.
2.	Finish: 1/8 inch (3 mm) tempered hardboard, with painted top surface.
3.	Finish: Black 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) thick standard textured polypropylene with black smooth HDPE backer sheet.
4.	Finish: Manufacturer's standard carpet, with plywood bottom. 
5.	Finish: Plywood substrate ready to receive scheduled field-applied carpet.
6.	Panel Dimensions: Manufacturer's standard sizes, as required for layout indicated.
H.	Guards and Railings: Complying with performance requirements, clamp-attached without tools, lower horizontal rail acts as chair stop. Optional infill panels bring Guard Rails into compliance with International Building Code specifying that a 4 inches (102 mm) sphere object cannot pass through the railing.
I.	Ramps:  Complying with performance and accessibility requirements including 2015 IBC Section 1012, adjustable to meet platform height, portable and compatible with platform panel storage cart.
J.	Stairs:  Fixed stair set, sized as required by platform layout, with handrails and slip-resistant treads.
K.	Stairs:  Adjustable stair set, sized as required by platform layout, with handrails and slip-resistant treads.
L.	Box Step:  Single relocatable box step equipped with clamps for fixing in place, height as required, located as indicated.
M.	Leg Storage Clips:  Provide bottom-of-deck panel leg storage clips.
N.	Chair Stops:
1.	Clamp on leg stop, able to be installed and demounted without tools constructed of tube steel.  
2.	Permanent chair stop constructed of extruded PVC and secured into deck with screws.
O.	Storage Cart:  Steel tube-framed, folding transport cart with heavy-duty 8 inches (200  mm) casters and clamping safety strap. Provide number of carts required for layout indicated. Cart designed to carry up to 6 decks without accessories (5 decks with permanent chair stop) or 6 guardrails. Combinations of decks and guardrails can be stored on cart.
P.	Closure Panels: Closure panels matching Standard textured horizontal surface, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick plywood, secured with tool-free snap attachment located as follows:
1.	Front of unit.
2.	Sides of unit.
3.	Intermediate risers.
Q.	Curtain Closures and Backdrops: Manufacturer's standard stage-drapery-fabric curtain closures with hanging accessories, as follows:
1.	Skirting closures.
2.	Backdrop closure, 8 foot- (2.4 m) high, with metal frame.
3.	Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
R.	Metal Finishes:
1.	Aluminum:  
a.	Mill finish on all components. 
b.	Painted frame, mill finish on all other components. 
c.	Painted frame, painted legs (except telescopic), mill finish on all other components. 
2.	Steel: Powder-coated finish.
S.	Opaque Finish for Hardboard: 100 percent acrylic paint, specially formulated for adhesion to hardboard surfaces, 2-coats (primer and topcoat), satin finish, black.
T.	Fabrication: Provide portable stages and risers meeting performance requirements, with the following characteristics:
1.	Portable and storable in space indicated.
2.	Easily set up and disassembled without use of special tools or loose fasteners.
3.	Modular and reconfigurable.
4.	Platform components replaceable with common tools to include corners, frame sections, and platform decking.
5.	Platforms supported by individual legs that are storable inside the platform frame.
6.	Platforms designed for comfortable and secure power-grip (closed-grip) anywhere around entire deck perimeter.
7.	Lightweight leg sets/understructures - 40 inches (1016 mm) tall or shorter weigh less than 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
2.14	OUTDOOR STAGE PLATFORMS 
A.	Basis of Design: StageTek Outdoor Platforms as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. 
B.	Structural Performance Requirements as measured on a 4 feet x 8 feet (1219 mm x 2438 mm) rectangular deck: 
1.	Stage Platforms: 
a.	Standard Uniform Live Load for decks with 4 legs: 125 lbf/sq ft (6 kN/sq m), meets L/150 deflection criteria. 
b.	Heavy-Duty Uniform Live Load for decks with 5th leg (or smaller deck): 150 lbf/sq ft (7.2 kN/sq m), meets L/180 deflection criteria. 
c.	Lateral Live Side Load: 12 lbf/sq ft (0.6 kN/sq m), based on deck top surface area, meets IBC code. 
d.	Concentrated Load: 500 lb (2.2 kN) applied via 1 inch (25 mm) diameter pin. 
e.	Fully replaceable components including corners, frame, and aluminum deck planks. Replaceable in the field with common tools. 
C.	Materials: 
1.	Aluminum: Complies with ASTM Standards listed above in section 1.3 I. 
2.	Hardware and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard non-corroding type, permanently mounted to units, remaining set or tightened under load and vibration in service, and designed to preclude user contact with sharp edges. 
D.	Frame: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum, 4 inches tall (102 mm), with hidden contours to accept attachments. Rounded 1.5 inches (38 mm) hand-hold area open to accept power-grip (closed-grip) around entire perimeter. Frame components are repairable and replaceable. 
E.	Corners: Cast 380 aluminum corner assembly engages leg 3 inches (76 mm) and secures leg with a full-length 2.75 inches (70 mm) convex brace driven by a threaded bolt operated with a nylon tee handle. Corner assemblies are repairable and replaceable. 
F.	Legs: Legs operate individually and are constructed of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum round tube, 2.50 inches diameter (64 mm) with a wall thickness of 0.075 inch (1.905 mm). 
1.	Custom Length Legs: Provide where required for layout indicated. 
2.	Fixed Height Legs:  Provide where indicated. Standard fixed-height legs available in 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, and 48 inches (203, 406, 610, 813, 1016 and 1219 mm) high, as required for layout indicated. Non-marking cap. Legs to store resting on frame rails or in clamping brackets within deck frames. 
3.	Adjustable Legs: Provide where indicated. Legs provided with an adjustable threaded foot and jam nut for infinite adjustability plus or minus 2 inches (51 mm) from nominal length of leg. The foot shall provide a non-marking rubber pad. 
4.	Telescoping Legs: Provide where indicated. Standard Telescoping Legs available in 3 configurations adjusting between 16 inches to 28 inches (406 to 711 mm), 24 inches to 40 inches (610 to 1016 mm), and 30 inches to 54 inches (762 to 1372 mm). Nominal height adjustment in increments of 4 inches (102 mm) secured with spring-loaded quick-release pin. Constructed of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum round outer tube, 2.50 by 0.075 inch (64 by 1.905 mm) telescoping over a 2 inch by 0.125 inch (51 by 3.17 mm) inner tube. With an adjustable threaded foot providing for fine adjustability between beyond nominal set length of leg. The foot shall provide a non-marking rubber pad. Inner and outer tubes secured with non-rattling bushings and shall not pull apart from each other.  
G.	Deck Panels: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum plank deck surface construction. 
1.	Planks with spaces for drainage. 
2.	Textured surface to improve traction and reduce shine. 
3.	Center cross support provided on deck sizes 4� x 8� (1219 x 2438 mm), 4� x 6� (1219 x 1829 mm), and 4� x 4� (1219 x 1219 mm). 
4.	Closed multi-cavity cross section for increased strength and resistance to twisting. 
5.	Weather resistant and will not rot, peel, warp or swell. 
6.	Noncombustible.
H.	Guards and Railings:  Complying with performance requirements, clamp-attached without tools, lower horizontal rail acts as chair stop. Optional infill panels bring Guard Rails into compliance with International Building Code specifying that a 4 inches (102 mm) sphere object cannot pass through the railing. 
I.	Ramps:  Complying with performance and accessibility requirements including 2015 IBC Section 1012, adjustable to meet platform height, portable and compatible with platform panel storage cart. 
J.	Stairs:  Fixed stair set, sized as required by platform layout, with handrails and slip-resistant treads. 
K.	Stairs:  Adjustable stair set, sized as required by platform layout, with handrails and slip-resistant treads. 
L.	Box Step:  Single relocatable box step equipped with clamps for fixing in place, height as required, located as indicated. 
M.	Leg Storage Clips:  Provide bottom-of-deck panel leg storage clips. 
N.	Chair Stops: 
1.	Clamp on leg stop, able to be installed and demounted without tools constructed of tube steel.  
2.	Permanent chair stop constructed of extruded PVC and secured into deck with screws. 
O.	Storage Cart:  Steel tube-framed, folding transport cart with heavy-duty 8 inches (200  mm) casters and clamping safety strap. Provide number of carts required for layout indicated. Cart designed to carry up to 6 decks without accessories (5 decks with permanent chair stop) or 6 guardrails. Combinations of decks and guardrails can be stored on cart. 
P.	Closure Panels:  Closure panels matching Standard textured horizontal surface, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick plywood, secured with tool-free snap attachment located as follows: 
1.	Front of unit. 
2.	Sides of unit. 
3.	Intermediate risers. 
Q.	Curtain Closures and Backdrops:  Manufacturer's standard stage-drapery-fabric curtain closures with hanging accessories, as follows: 
1.	Skirting closures. 
2.	Backdrop closure, 8 foot- (2.4 m) high, with metal frame. 
3.	Color:  As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 
R.	Metal Finishes: 
1.	Aluminum:  
a.	Mill finish on all components. 
b.	Painted frame, mill finish on all other components. 
c.	Painted frame, painted legs (except telescopic), mill finish on all other components. 
2.	Steel: Powder-coated finish. 
S.	Fabrication:  Provide portable stages and risers meeting performance requirements, with the following characteristics: 
1.	Portable and storable in space indicated. 
2.	Easily set up and disassembled without use of special tools or loose fasteners. 
3.	Modular and reconfigurable. 
4.	Platform components replaceable with common tools to include corners, frame sections, and platform decking. 
5.	Platforms supported by individual legs that are storable inside the platform frame. 
6.	Platforms designed for comfortable and secure power-grip (closed-grip) anywhere around entire deck perimeter. 
7.	Lightweight leg sets/understructures - 40 inches (1016 mm) tall or shorter weigh less than 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
2.15	MUSICAL INSTRUMENT STORAGE CASEWORK
A.	Basis of Design: UltraStor Storage Cabinets as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Modular instrument storage casework with integral bases, adjustable levelers, and through-bolted fastening, enabling owner reconfiguration of unit layout. 
1.	Adjustable shelf system integrated into cabinet walls allowing shelf placement at increments common to musical instruments. No loose parts or tools required. Shelf system to include a latch to prevent unintended shelf movement.
B.	Basis of Design: AcoustiCabinets as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Modular instrument storage casework with integral bases, adjustable levelers, and through-bolted fastening, enabling owner reconfiguration of unit layout.
1.	Acoustically enhanced instrument storage casework finished with interior lining of sound-absorbent material providing sound absorption and noise reduction properties.
2.	Sound Absorption Average: Minimum SAA of 0.80, based upon sound absorption coefficient for twelve one-third octave bands from 200 to 2500 Hz, inclusive, with a minimum Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.75, per ASTM C 423 and ASTM E 795.
3.	Acoustical Performance: Comply with manufacturer's published sound absorption data.
4.	Wave grille doors in 5/16 inch (24 mm) and 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter designed to reduce vibration.
5.	Adjustable shelf system integrated into cabinet walls allowing shelf placement at increments common to musical instruments. No loose parts or tools required. Shelf system to include a latch to prevent unintended shelf movement.
C.	Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" based upon seismic design criteria indicated.
D.	Storage Casework Component Load Capacities:
1.	Storage Casework Wire-Grille Door Hinge: Each weld capable of resisting 400 lbf (1779 N) pull test without visible damage or permanent deformation.
2.	Storage Casework Full Grille Door Hinge: Full length door capable of supporting 315 lbs (143 kg). Through open and close cycle without permanent damage. 
3.	Robe and Uniform Storage Casework Garment Hanger Rods: Capable of supporting vertical load applied uniformly along width of unit of 200 lbf (890 N).
E.	Robe and uniform storage casework with integral bases, adjustable levelers, and through-bolted fastening, enabling owner reconfiguration of unit layout.
F.	General: Provide through-ventilating instrument storage casework meeting requirements in System Description and Performance Requirements Articles.
G.	General: Provide through-ventilating robe and uniform storage casework meeting requirements in System Description and Performance Requirements Articles.
H.	Side Panels and Divider Panels: Particleboard thermoset panel with no urea formaldehyde added, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. Side panels machined to accept unit-to-unit through-bolting.
I.	Grille Doors: Bright basic steel wire, 5/16 and 3/16 inch (7.9 and 4.8 mm) diameter, or 5/16 and 1/4 inch (7.9 and 6.3 mm) diameter for AcoustiCabinets, with full 360 degree welds at T-joints.
1.	Provide for instrument storage casework.
2.	Provide for robe and uniform storage casework.
3.	Provide for casework indicated.
J.	Panel Doors: Particleboard thermoset panel with no urea formaldehyde added, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. 
1.	Color: Oyster.
2.	Color: Maple.
3.	Color: Pebble.
4.	Color: Cherry.
5.	Color: Evening Tigris.
6.	Color: Fusion Maple.
7.	Color: Solar Oak.
8.	Color: As scheduled.
9.	Door Grille: Provide for instrument storage casework, full height.
10.	Door Grille: Provide for instrument storage casework, compartment height.
11.	Door Grille: Provide for Robe and Uniform Storage Casework.
12.	Door Grille: Provide for casework indicated.
K.	Open Casework: Provide casework without doors.
1.	Provide for robe and uniform storage casework.
2.	Provide for casework indicated.
L.	Panel Edge Banding: 3 mm thick, heat-bonded, with radiused and profiled edges and corners.
M.	Shelving: Sized with adequate gap between shelving and casework side panels to allow air movement inside casework.
1.	Up to 27 inches (686 mm) wide: Removable molded polyethylene shelf, with impact-resistant, radiused front edge, mounted to cabinet wall with self-locking clip.
2.	Over 27 inches (686 mm) wide: For large instrument casework: Removable formed polyethylene shelf, ribbed, with high-impact-resistant, radiused front edge, supported by steel tube frame.
3.	Tubular steel supports are included for shelves over 19 inches (483 mm) wide.
4.	Corner cabinet revolving shelving: 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) min. thickness steel sheet bolted to revolving steel center post, with radiused hardboard deflector panel.
N.	Flag Storage and Garment Ring: 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter steel rod bolted to steel center post with 10 gauge steel brackets.
O.	Flag Storage Bottom Shelf Pad: Carpet pad, adhered to steel shelf.
P.	Casework Panel Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
Q.	Filler Panels and Closure: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick particleboard thermoset panels with no urea formaldehyde in Oyster color. Provide the following, cut to fit field conditions, where indicated:
1.	Wall filler between cabinet side and wall.
2.	Top filler between cabinet top and wall.
3.	Top of cabinet closure panel between cabinet and finished ceiling or soffits.
4.	Finished back panel for exposed cabinet backs. 
R.	Butt Hinges: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.090 inch (2.29 mm) thick metal, ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with powder-coated finish, through-bolted to door and side panels and welded to grille door frames. Provide 2 hinges on compartment doors, and 4 hinges on full-height doors.
S.	Slide Latch: 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) min. thickness steel, with padlock eye, powder-coat finish, through-bolted to panel door and side panel and welded to grille door frames. Latches securely without padlock. Provide with clear plastic label holder for use with standard size labels; number system available for user to print. Padlocks furnished by Owner.
T.	Panel Connectors: 1/4 - 20 by 1.77 inch (45 mm) panel connectors, with steel thread inserts, powder coated to match panels. 
U.	Cabinet Levelers: Leveling glides with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter threaded steel rod in steel corner brackets, minimum two each per cabinet side, accessible from within unit, and concealed in completed installation.
V.	Carcass joinery includes lag screws powder coated to match substrate.
W.	Back panel 7/32 inch (5.6 mm) reinforced with 3/4 inch (19 mm) stretchers panels held in a dado groove and lag screwed in place.
X.	Fasteners: Manufacturer-recommended fasteners as required for casework substrate and project performance requirements, consisting of one or more of the following:
1.	Sheet Metal Screws: SAE J78, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.
2.	Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
3.	Expansion Anchors in Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units: Carbon-steel, zinc plated.
4.	Hardware supplied to anchor the cabinets to the wall and to adjacent casework.
Y.	Finish: Steel Sheet, Steel Wire, and Exposed Fasteners. Urethane-based electrostatic powder coating, color as indicated. Refer to Drawings.
Z.	Materials Meeting Sustainable Design Requirements:
1.	No Added Urea Formaldehyde Products: Provide music education storage casework made with composite products and adhesives with no urea formaldehyde added.
2.	FSC Certified Wood Products: Provide music education storage casework made with wood from certified sources. Also available in Moisture Resistant, Class 1 Fire rated and Plywood cores. 
AA.	Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, minimum 43 lb/cu. ft. (689 kg/cu. m) density, composite products and adhesives, with no urea formaldehyde added.
AB.	Fire Rated Particle Board: ANSI A208.1, minimum 45 lb/cu. ft. (720 kg/cu. m) density ASTM E-84 class 1.
AC.	Plywood: APA standards PS1-98 section 5.7.4 or 5.7.1 or ANSI /HPVA HP-1-2004 Panel provide with HDF skins to prevent grain telegraphing.
AD.	Particleboard Thermoset Panels: Particleboard finished with thermally-fused polyester surfacing on both sides meeting performance properties of NEMA LD 3 for VGS grade, edge-banded, including the following:
1.	Surface Abrasion Resistance: Taber Wheel, 400 cycles, for solid colors.
AE.	Particleboard Thermoset Panels: Particleboard panel with no formaldehyde added 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick finished with thermally-fused polyester surfacing on both sides meeting performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 for VGS grade, edge-banded, including the following:
1.	Surface Abrasion Resistance: Taber Wheel, 400 cycles, for solid colors.
AF.	Polyethylene Shelves: High-density, one-piece, blow-molded or polyethylene, with radiused front edge, for abuse-resistant shelves. Same color throughout will not show scratches.
AG.	PVC Edge Banding: Radiused PVC extrusions, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2.16	MUSIC LIBRARY SYSTEM
A.	Basis of Design: Music Library System as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
1.	Standard Width 7-Shelf Unit: 173G700 S, 16 inches (41 cm) wide; 12 inches x 34-1/2 inches x 10-1/2 inches (30 x 88 x 27 cm) of shelf space available; 4 shelves adjustable, 3 shelves fixed. 
2.	Oversized Width 7-Shelf Unit: 173G700 O, 19 inches (48 cm) wide; 15 inches x 34-1/2 inches x 10-1/2 inches (38 x 88 x 27 cm) of shelf space available; 4 shelves adjustable, 3 shelves fixed. 
3.	Standard Width 6-Shelf Unit: 173G600 S, 16 inches (41 cm) wide; 12 inches x 34-1/2 inches x 10-1/2 inches (30 x 88 x 27 cm) of shelf space available; 4 shelves adjustable, 2 shelves fixed. 
4.	Oversized Width 6-Shelf Unit: 173G600 O; 19 inches (48 cm) wide; 15 inches x 34-1/2 inches x 10-1/2 inches (38 x 88 x 27 cm) of shelf space available; 4 shelves adjustable, 2 shelves fixed. 
B.	Design and Construction:
1.	Pull-out design, equally spaced shelves provide 10-1/2 inches (27 cm) of available height per shelf.
2.	Units are constructed of 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors.
3.	Shelves are reinforced with an aluminum extrusion that includes a slot with vinyl material for labeling with dry-erase markers.
4.	Frame is 16-gauge, 1 inch (2.54 cm) square tubular steel, painted black.
5.	Back panel is designed to fit on either side of unit for left or right hand use.
6.	Includes four 8 inch (20 cm) diameter casters.
7.	Each unit contains bumpers for control of side and outward movement.
8.	Unit requires anchoring to floor and wall.
9.	Each shelf rated at 100 lbs. (45 kg) maximum capacity.
10.	Ten-year warranty.
11.	Top closure, constructed particleboard that matches the end covers, supports up to 50 lb/lin.ft. (74 kg/m) loading. 
12.	Oblique file system accessory on standard 12 inch (30 cm) shelf widths. 
13.	Lock option (padlocks not included).
C.	Substrate and Loading: Verify substrate is concrete or epoxy coated concrete; not recommended for installation on padded carpet or vinyl flooring.
1.	Floor point load for a 7-shelf unit at rated load is 800 psi (5516 kpa) per caster. 
2.	Floor point load for a 6-shelf unit at rated load is 700 psi (4826 kpa) per caster.
D.	Sustainability: GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified and GREENGUARD Children and Schools Certified.
2.17	FIXED THEATER MAKE-UP STATIONS
A.	Basis of Design: Studio Make-Up Stations as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Wall-mounted casework unit with countertop, shelf, mirror, electrical convenience outlet, and make up lights (light bulbs not supplied).
B.	Size: Nominal 36 inch (910 mm) wide model: 40-3/8-inch wide by 20-inch deep by 44-inch high (1030 mm by 510 mm by 1120 mm).
C.	Size: Nominal 30 inch (76 cm) wide model: 34-3/8-inch wide by 20-inch deep 44-inch high (870 mm by 510 mm by 1120 mm).
D.	Size: As indicated on Drawings.
E.	Countertop: Thermoset panel, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, concave shape.
F.	Overhead Shelf: Thermoset panel.
1.	Size: 12-inches (305-mm) deep by width of casework.
G.	Mirror: 28 inch (711 mm) by 8 inches (203 mm) less than nominal unit width.
1.	ASTM C 1503, clear glass, mirror glazing quality, with steel laminated backing. 
H.	Tackboard:
1.	Size: 6-inch wide by 28-inch long (152-mm wide by 711-mm long).
2.	Mounting: Top.
3.	Mounting: Side.
4.	Mounting: Bottom.
I.	Electrical Wiring: 3-wire, 24-inch (610-mm) electrical pigtail below the countertop prepared for hard wiring to building electrical service.
1.	Power: 115 VAC single phase.
2.	Power: 250 VAC single phase (European).
3.	Light switch: Rocker switch controlling make up lights.
4.	GFCI convenience receptacle, 20A. (Domestic Only).
J.	Make Up Lights:
1.	Lamp Bases: Medium (one-inch) Edison-base accepting maximum 60W incandescent or 15W swirl fluorescent lamps. Lamps to be provided by others.
2.	Lamp Bases: Medium Edison-base accepting maximum 60W incandescent or 15W swirl fluorescent lamps. Lamps to be provided by others.
3.	Lamp Bases: 27mm EU lamp bases.
4.	Lamp Base Quantity: 9 for free-standing units; 6 for paired units.
5.	Lamp Base Quantity: 8 for free-standing units; 5 for paired units.
6.	Protective Cages: Wire cages, 3/16 inch (5 mm) diameter steel wire, configured to allow changing of lamps without removing cage.
K.	Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade LD or MD.
L.	Thermoset Panels: Fiberboard finished with thermally-fused PVC with melamine backer, with the following characteristics:
1.	Surface Abrasion Resistance: Taber Wheel, 400 cycles.
M.	Accessories:
1.	Storage Cage: Under-counter storage cage.
2.	Pull Out Drawer: Under-counter lockable sliding drawer.
3.	Tack Pad: White tackable surface in a matte white frame mounted on mirror.
N.	Hardware:
1.	Mounting Bracket: Individual mounting bracket with multiple holes and adjustable vertical slots for leveling between units in multiple unit installation.
O.	Finishes:
1.	Steel Sheet, Steel Wire, and Exposed Fasteners: Urethane-based electrostatic powder coating.
a.	Mirror surround and corner accent panel color: White.
2.18	PORTABLE THEATER MAKE-UP STATIONS
A.	Basis or Design: Backstage Portable Make-Up Stations as manufactured by Wenger Corporation Equipped with convenience handle, head and shoulders mirror, make up lights, electrical receptacle, and electrical power cord (light bulbs not supplied).
1.	Size: 33 inches wide by 9-3/8 inches deep by 33-1/4 inches high (840 mm wide by 240 mm deep by 850 mm high).
2.	Framing: Steel frame with aluminum trim.
3.	Weight: 38 lb (17.2 kg).
4.	Base: Four rubber feet.
5.	Lamp Bases: Six bases accepting 60-watt incandescent or 15-watt fluorescent lamps, with switch. Lamps to be provided by others.
6.	Wiring: 10-foot (3048-mm), 12 ga. wire with plug end.
7.	Convenience Outlet: GFCI receptacle.
8.	Case Finish: Matte white.
2.19	METAL SHELVING SYSTEMS 
A.	GearBoss Metal Shelving Systems, Shelf Starter Bay, Shelf Add-On Bay, and Shelves by Wenger Corporation:  Cantilever-type modular metal storage shelving system comprised of the following components: 
1.	Structural Performance: 
a.	Allowable Load Rating: 1000 lb. (373 kg) per 4 by 8-foot (1219 by 2438-mm) bay. 
b.	Load-Carrying Capacity per 48 inch (1219 mm) Shelf:  250 lb. (113 kg). 
2.	Shelf Unit Uprights: Steel tube, metallic-coated, 2-inch (50.8 mm) square, 0.109-inch (2.76 mm) thick, with perforations on all four sides at 1 inch (25 mm) on center. 
3.	Horizontal Stringer: Formed sheet steel, metallic-coated, 0.075-inch (1.9-mm) thick. 
4.	Shelf Cross Tubes: 14 gauge steel tube, metallic-coated, 5/8-inch (22-mm) square. 
5.	Shelf Brackets: Formed steel, 0.015-inch (0.38-mm) thick. 
6.	Laminate-Clad Wood Panels: Core material and thickness indicated, finished with thermally-fused anti-microbial polyester surfacing on both sides. 
7.	Unit Width: 48 inch (1219 mm) center-to-center unless otherwise indicated. 
8.	Unit Height: 96 inches (2438 mm). 
9.	Unit Height: As indicated on the Drawings. 
10.	Shelves can be adjusted in 1 inch (25 mm) increment without tools. 
B.	Metal Shelving Materials: 
1.	Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221. 
2.	Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, ASTM A1008, commercial steel, type B. 
3.	Steel Tube: ASTM A501, hot-formed steel tubing. 
4.	Steel Wire: ASTM C510, cold drawn steel wire. 
5.	Particleboard: To ANSI A208.1, minimum 43 lb/cu. ft. (689 kg/cu. m) density. 
6.	Plywood: APA standards PS1-98 section 5.7.4 or 5.7.1 or ANSI /HPVA HP-1-2004 Panel provide with HDF skins to prevent grain telegraphing.
7.	Steel Tube: ASTM A500, cold-formed steel tubing. 
8.	Laminate Finish: Composite, of thickness indicated, finished with thermally-fused anti-microbial polyester surfacing on both sides, meeting performance properties of NEMA LD3 for VGS grade, with heat bonded, radiused, 3 mm thick extruded PVC edge banding. 
a.	Surface Abrasion Resistance: Taber Wheel, 400 cycles, for solid colors.
9.	PVC Edge Banding: LMA EDG-1, radiused PVC extrusions, 3 mm thick, heat-bonded. 
10.	Anchors and Fasteners:
a.	Factory Provided: Material, type, and size recommended by manufacturer for secure anchorage to substrate. 
b.	Field Installed: Manufacturer-recommended fasteners furnished by Contractor as required for locker substrate and project requirements.
C.	Metal Shelving Fabrication: 
1.	Fabricate components square, and rigid. Make exposed metal safe to touch and free of sharp ends or burrs. 
2.	Form frames, panels, doors, and accessories from one-piece, or one rigid assembly, unless specifically shown on Shop Drawings. 
3.	Factory preassemble metal components by welding all joints, and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly, except as required for knock down shipping and attachment to mounting surfaces. 
D.	Metal Shelving Accessories: 
1.	Shelf Depth: 17.5 inches (444 mm) with 2 cross tubes. 
2.	Shelf Depth: 30.5 inches (775 mm) with 4 cross tubes. 
3.	Lock Box: Steel sides and bottom, polished aluminum front, key-tab lock, hinged door panel lockable with a key. 
4.	Work Surface: Particleboard laminate-clad panel with graphite high wear laminate with black edge band, 1-1/8-inch (28.6-mm) thick, inserted into 30-1/2 inch (775 mm) cantilever shelf bracket over cross tubes. Quantity of work surfaces as indicated on Drawings. 
5.	Cantilevered Shelf: Steel tube and bracket, with aluminum extrusion nosing, mill finish unless otherwise indicated. 
6.	Hinged Panel Doors: Laminate clad panel door 5/8-inch (15.9 mm) thick. 
7.	Garment Hanger: Steel round tube mounts underneath shelf; powder-coat finish, black. Quantity of garment bars as indicated on Drawings. 
8.	Drawer: Pull-out utility drawer mounted under work surface. 
E.	Metal Shelving Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 
2.20	MODULAR SOUND-ISOLATION PRACTICE ROOMS 
A.	Basis of Design: SoundLok Sound-Isolating Practice Rooms as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Factory-fabricated, modular, sound-isolation enclosures with sound transmission characteristics meeting requirements. Enclosures shall be internally wired for power, lighting, and ventilation controls. Site-fabricated enclosures and enclosures with site-installed gaskets and sealants shall not be allowed. Modifications to room on site affect acoustical performance and laboratory test data. 
1.	Rooms shall be assembled from factory-gasketed modular components that allow reconfiguration and relocation without component modification or loss of acoustical performance.
2.	Interior Room Height: 7 feet 6 inches (2260 mm).
3.	Interior Room Height: 8 feet 0 inches (2438 mm).
4.	Interior Room Height: 8 feet 6 inches (2591 mm).
5.	Interior Room Height: 9 feet 0 inches (2743 mm).
6.	Interior Room Height: 9 feet 6 inches (2896 mm).
7.	Interior Room Height: 10 feet 0 inches (3048 mm).
B.	Room Variation: Sound-isolation practice rooms (with VAE) shall be equipped with manufacturer's Virtual Acoustical Environment (VAE) simulation system with integrated wiring, speakers, and microphones capable of providing room sonic environment simulation of a range in preset and customized practice and performance environments.
C.	Room Variation: Sound-isolation practice rooms (upgradeable to VAE) shall be equipped with integrated and wiring, raceways, panel cutouts for speakers and microphones, all concealed within wall panels to allow room to be upgraded with the VAE technology system in the future. No external mounted wiring, raceways, speakers, or microphones allowed.
D.	Room Variation: Sound-isolation practice rooms (non-upgradeable to VAE) shall be standard room that does NOT have the ability to be upgraded to the VAE technology system.
E.	Airborne Noise Reduction: Sound-isolation practice rooms with 410 cu. ft. (11.6 cu. m) interior volume, 34 percent perforated interior panels, 12 inch (304 mm) airspace between modules, mounted on concrete floor construction, tested as follows:
1.	NIC 41 from exterior to interior of module, per independent lab test.
2.	NIC 63 from interior of one module to interior of adjacent module, with 12 inches (304 mm) airspace between modules, per independent lab test.
F.	Ambient Noise at Center of sound-isolation room: Lighting and ventilating systems operating, per ANSI S 12.2: Not exceeding NC 25.
G.	Reverberation Time: Sound-Isolation Practice Rooms with 640 cu. ft. (18.12 cu. m) interior volume: in contiguous octave bands, center frequencies from 125 to 4000 Hz, per ASTM C 423: 0.45 plus or minus 0.10 seconds.
H.	Ventilation Air Change Rate: Sound-isolation practice rooms with 406 cu. ft. (11.5 cu. m) interior volume shall have 35 air changes per hour. Other rooms will vary according to size and occupancy.
I.	Sound-Isolating Door Sound Transmission Class: With full window, per internal testing only: STC 46.
J.	HVAC Ceiling Panel Sound Transmission Class: Per internal testing only: STC 45.
K.	Safety Glazing Products: 16 CFR 1201.
L.	Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" based upon seismic design criteria indicated. 
M.	Wall Frame: 14-gauge/0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick steel channel with 1-1/4 inch (31.75 mm) thick factory-applied acoustical gasketing at floor slab, with 3/4 inch (19 mm) leveling adjustment.
N.	Wall Panels: 30 inches by 4 inches (762 by 102 mm) thick composite panels, consisting of an exterior face of 16-gauge/0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) sheet steel, an interior face of 22-gauge/0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) perforated or solid sheet steel, with sound-attenuation material at panels indicated as perforated. 
1.	Acoustical Seal: Two continuous acoustical gaskets factory-mounted at panel perimeter.
2.	Panel Attachment: Two or more mechanical locks on each vertical edge to align and engage adjoining panel and create compression seal between panels. 
3.	Corner Assembly: Same construction as wall panels.
4.	Power Panel (one per unit): Same construction as wall panels, with factory pre-wiring meeting ETL and NEC requirements, consisting of conduit, wiring, junction and electrical boxes, and airtight cover plates, and including the following:
a.	Two duplex receptacles.
b.	Dimmable switches, occupancy sensors and connectors for lighting control (and fans, and VAE, as required).
c.	Three empty raceways for future Owner-installed circuitry.
5.	Acoustic Vision Lite Wall Panel: Same construction as wall panels, 30 inches (762 mm) wide, with nominal 26.5 by 65.5 inches (673 by 1664 mm) vision lite, respectively, consisting of 1/4 and 3/8 inch (6.0 and 9.5 mm) thick laminated safety glass with 3 inches (76 mm) interspace, mounted in metal frame. Refer to Drawings for location.
a.	Provide one-way vision safety glass. Refer to Drawings for location.
6.	Horizontal Window, 90 degrees wide (2286mm), with nominal 32 inches x 81-3/4 inches (813mm x 2076mm) vision lite.
7.	Horizontal Window, 60 degrees (1524mm) wide, with nominal 32 inches x 51-3/4 inches (813mm x 1314mm) vision lite.
8.	Communication Wall Panels: Where indicated: Same construction as wall panels, size and configuration indicated, with factory installed rough-in for addition wiring by owner, consisting of conduit, junction boxes, and airtight cover plates, and includes one pre-wired quad outlet.
O.	Ceiling Frame: Sheet steel, 16-gauge/0.053 inch (1.34 mm) thick, with clamping mechanism for compressing ceiling panel acoustical gaskets, with external support beam where required by room size.
P.	Ceiling Panels: Same construction as wall panels, 15 inches wide by 6 inches thick (381 mm wide by 152 mm thick), with the following characteristics:
1.	Acoustical Seal: Two continuous acoustical gaskets factory mounted at panel perimeter. 
2.	Panel Attachment: Two mechanical locks on each vertical edge to align and engage adjoining panel and create compression seal between panels. 
3.	Sprinkler Ceiling Panels: Where indicated, panels fabricated with predrilled holes to enable fire sprinkler system installation specified elsewhere. Furnish covers for installations not requiring sprinkler piping penetration.
4.	Light Panels: Where indicated, highly efficient, 50/60Hz, 100-277 Volt AC, 40 Watt, 1'x 4' dimmable edge-lit LED flat panels. Technical information; power factor: 0.9, lifetime (L70): 50,000 hours, LED chip type: 2835, number of LEDs (per panel): 216, physical dimensions: 11.83 inches (W) x 47.63 inches (L) x 0.39 inches (H), color temperature: 5000k (standard), lumens: 4200, beam angle: 120 degrees, RA value: 80, compatible with 0-10V dimmers. Compliance and approvals: ETL, FCC, DLC QPL, IP rating: damp locations.
Q.	Doors: 2 inches (51 mm) thick composite panel, consisting of an exterior face of 16-gauge/0.053 inch (1.34 mm) sheet steel, an interior face of 14-gauge/0.068 inch- (1.72 mm-) sheet steel, and a core of sound-attenuation material, sound transmission class (STC) 46 (based on internal testing), size and swing as indicated on Drawings, and as follows:
1.	Acoustical Seals: Magnetic seal plus compression seal at head and jambs, and adjustable sweep seal at door bottom.
2.	Hinge: Cam-type wrap around continuous barrel hinge, CR 1010 steel.
3.	Door size: 3 feet (914 mm) wide standard.
4.	Door size: 4 feet (1219 mm) wide.
5.	Door size: 6 feet (1829 mm) wide double door with removable mullion.
6.	Door Vision Lite: Nominal 22 by 66 inches (559 by 1676 mm), glazed with safety glass. 
a.	Provide one-way vision safety glass. Refer to drawings for location.
7.	Metal threshold: Stainless steel, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) high.
8.	Lockset: ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1, cylindrical lock with lever handle, 6 pin cylinder, classroom function locking, satin nickel finish.
9.	Keying: Each keyed differently.
10.	Keying: Interchangeable core, with cylinder specified in Section 08 71 53 - Security Door Hardware.
R.	Virtual Acoustical Environment (VAE) System: Manufacturer's standard electronic sound system providing integrated record and playback capabilities, with nine virtual acoustical simulations within sound-isolating room, including:
1.	Eight speakers mounted in pre-wired corner panel speaker enclosures.
2.	Push-button operated control panel with associated electronic components.
3.	Microphone Wall Panel: Same construction as solid wall panels, with two integrated microphone mounts and two microphones.
4.	Systems using non-integrated components or external reverberation/special effects components are not acceptable.
S.	Ceiling Ventilation System: Provide manufacturer's, built-in fan standard free-standing room ventilation system:
1.	Vent Panels: 15 inches (381 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) thick panel with integral acoustical air plenum, with 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) sound-absorbing duct liner and four 90-degree bends.
2.	Fan Exhaust Panels: 120 cfm (0.057 cu. m/s) exhaust fan mounted in panel with same construction panel as vent intake panel. Number of fan panels equal to number of vent panels. Fan exhausts to surrounding space.
T.	Ceiling Ventilation System, Connection to Building HVAC System: 
1.	Vent Panels: 15 inch (381 mm) wide by 6-inch (152 mm) thick panel with integral acoustical air plenum, with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sound-absorbing duct liner and four 90-degree bends, with 8 inch (203 mm) diameter duct connector. Capacity: 120 cfm (.057 cu. m/s) maximum per vent panel. Configured in pairs of intake and exhaust panels as indicated. Flexible ductwork specified in mechanical section and provided by others.
U.	Closure Panels: Provide vertical and horizontal closures between modules and above modules to close off space visually. Constructed of 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick composite wood with low-pressure thermofused laminates. 
1.	Color: Oyster. 
2.	Color: Vanilla. 
3.	Color: Warm Sand. 
V.	Floor Component System: Where indicated: Sheet vinyl flooring bonded to high density 1-1/8 inches (22 mm) thick particleboard, supported by steel under structure, with 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) sound-absorbing vibration isolators, supported on 6-1/4 Hz natural frequency vibration isolators with 1/4 inches (6 mm) maximum deflection under typical loading, joined by mechanical fasteners and aligned by interlocking steel support clips. Floor fabricated for installation inside finished practice room without disassembly of modules.
W.	Mirror:  Mounts directly to interior solid wall panel.  Metal mounting brackets in black painted finish are provided.  Dimensions:  58 inches (1473 mm) high x 22 inches (559 mm) wide with 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick mirror glass, constructed with vinyl backing to prevent shattering of glass.
X.	Metronome/Tuner: Mounts directly to interior solid wall panel and houses battery-operated metronome/tuner, Korg Model TM40. Mounting bracket included. Overall dimensions: 4-3/4 inches (121 mm) wide x 4-3/4 inches (121 mm) high x 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
Y.	Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B.
Z.	Sound Attenuation Material: ASTM C 665, Type I, 1.5-lb/cu. ft (24 kg/cu. m).
AA.	Finish for Electrical Cover Plates: 
1.	Light, Fan and VAE Switch (as required): Satin chrome finish.
2.	All other: Painted to match wall panel colors. 
AB.	Finishes for Other Exposed Components: Iron phosphate pre-coat and thermo-set epoxy resin powder coat (baked) finish.
1.	Colors:
a.	Wall and ceiling panels: Oyster.
b.	Wall and ceiling panels: Vanilla.
c.	Wall and ceiling panels: Warm Sand.
d.	Floor rail and door: Charcoal Grey.
e.	Floor rail and door: Warm Beige.
2.21	FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 
A.	Basis of Design - Upholstered Fixed Seating System: Wenger Cavea Fixed Audience Seating: www.wengercorp.com. 
B.	Description: Fixed seating system designed to permit radial installation using common middle support standards in each row and aisle standards aligned as indicated on drawings. Width of seats not less than 19 inches (483 mm). 
C.	Seating system consists of a wing installed upholstered back and a drop-in self-lifting upholstered seat which automatically returns to a position with the underside of the seat in alignment with the front of the aisle panel. 
D.	Back: 
1.	Adjustable wing system type; two-panel construction with fabric covering over cold-molded closed cell surround foam and protective back panel, with installed height 33 inches (889 mm) above finished floor. 
2.	MIG-welded tubular steel frame with contoured steel back slats. 
3.	Sculptured cold mold closed cell foam fully surrounds and encapsulates the steel frame with a protective skin preventing dust and humidity from getting into the foam. 
4.	Adjustable back wing attachment system allows chairs to be installed on concave, convex radii, and/or straight rows, where chair widths can be adjusted for seat sizes 19, 20, 21, and 22 inches. 
5.	Adjustable back wing attachment system allows back angle pitches of 19, 16, and 13 degrees. 
6.	Outer Back Cover:
a.	Type: Injection molded polypropylene outer back cover. 
b.	Type: Injection molded polypropylene outer back cover with veneer inlay.  Veneer inlay color selection from manufacturer's standard options. 
7.	Padding:  Cold-molded closed cell sculptured high resiliency polyurethane foam, 2.8 lb. /cu ft. (44.9 kg/cu m) density, 2 inches (64 mm) thick which is bonded to and fully covering structural support. 
8.	Covering: Fabric installed using slipcover style to facilitate easy replacement.
E.	Seat: 
1.	Hinged drop-in type, two-panel construction with fabric covering over cold-molded surround foam and protective seat bottom cover. 
2.	MIG-Welded tubular steel seat structure will support 600 lbs. of weight on the front edge of seat.  
3.	Webbing attached to the steel seat structure supports the user ergonomically allowing proper blood flow. 
4.	Sculptured cold molded closed cell foam fully surrounds and encapsulates the steel frame with a protective skin preventing dust and humidity from getting into the foam.  
5.	Assembly of the foam will not use any adhesives or glue harming the environment. 
6.	Seat Bottom Cover:
a.	Type: Injection molded polypropylene seat bottom cover.
b.	Type: Injection molded polypropylene seat bottom cover with veneer inlay.  Veneer inlay color selection from manufacturer' standard options.
7.	Seat Drop-in System: Seat attachment system allows chairs to be installed on concave, convex radii, and/or straight rows, where chair widths can be adjusted for seat sizes 19, 20, 21, and 22 inches.  
8.	No maintenance fastening system allows seat mechanism to be attached without the use of any screws or nuts. 
9.	Automatic gravity lift system without spring assistance for maintenance free use. 
10.	Maintenance free aluminum drop in seat mechanism functions without any screws needing regular tightening. 
11.	Fully enclosed aluminum seat mechanism with injection molded polypropylene cover for safety. 
12.	Sound performance noise level to remain below 30 decibels. 
13.	Seat mechanism allows for customization of seat pitch while in use or resting position.
14.	Padding: Cold molded closed cell sculptured high resiliency polyurethane foam, 3.2 lb. /cu ft (51.3 kg/cu m) density, 3 inches (76 mm) thick, bonded to and covering structural support and mesh.
15.	Seat Closed Depth (Envelope): 16.7 inches (424 mm), maximum. 
16.	Hinges: 
a.	Pivot point axles that drop into lock hinge mechanisms on the support standards, equipped with enclosed counterweight non-pinching gravity lift system, without springs, allowing unoccupied seat to rise automatically to vertical position. 
b.	Provide push-back hinge mechanism that allows additional aisle space while seat is in an open position.
F.	Standards: 
1.	Vertical steel tubular pipe standard measuring 1.6 inches (40mm) x 1 inches (40mm) made from 14-gauge steel. 
2.	Mounting plate for sloped floors flat floors or riser mounting to be .25 inches (6mm) thick steel plate measuring 5 inches (127mm) x 1.8 inches (46mm).  
3.	Horizontal support arm made from solid steel bar measuring .75 inches (19mm) x .75 inches (19mm) welded into vertical standard pipe. 
4.	Tubular steel pipe standard to be welded to the steel mounting plate using a 360-degree continuous MIG-welding system. 
G.	Arm Rests: 
1.	Locate at aisles and between chairs; attached to standard horizontal support arm with concealed fasteners; exposed surfaces polyurethane or solid hardwood lumber with smoothed edges.  
2.	Type: Polyurethane arm cap to have metal insert which will be attached to the horizontal support arm using a keyhole system. 
3.	Type: Wood arm cap which will be attached to the horizontal support arm using a keyhole system without any wood screws used at all.
H.	End Panels: 
1.	Type: Open end panel to have .25 inches (6mm) thick horizontal support plate measuring 6.4 inches (163mm) x 4 inches (100mm) welded to vertical support standard. 
2.	Type: Plywood end panel 7-ply, 9/16 inch (14 mm) thick covered with wood veneer exterior to be attached to the end standard with threaded T-Nuts and no wood screws.
I.	Product Accessories: 
1.	Hercules Folding Tablet Arms: Mounted on standards to right side of each seat with non-lubricated hinge and swivel mechanism securely fastened to underside of writing surface and designed to provide solid support in the open position and semi-automatic return to stowed position outside of the right arm rest and parallel to right standard; non-handed design for use by left and right-handed occupants. 
a.	Finish: Reinforced Polymer, in black, with smooth rounded edges.  
b.	Size: Writing surface not less than 178 sq inches (0.1148 sq m). 
c.	Tablet arm in open position does not protrude into aisle or adjacent seat space. 
d.	Tablet arm in open position rests on top of armrest for added strength. 
e.	Tablet arm in closed position does not interfere with armrest usage. 
2.	Aisle Lights: Standard UL-approved surface mounted and concealed LED lamp assemblies, with louvers to conceal lamp and direct light toward floor, mounted on vertical end panel surface or beneath aisle arm rest; wiring route concealed to floor connection. 
3.	Seat Numbers: Recessed black plate with white seat numbers securely fastened to front edge of folding seats.   
4.	Row Letters: Recessed or Surface Mounted black plate with white letters securely fastened to vertical surface of aisle panels. 
5.	Donor and ADA, Plates: Standard plates securely fastened to end aisle panels; black finish, with letters and numbers countersunk and filled with white paint. 
6.	End Panels: Open End, Wood Veneer, and ADA Swing Out.  
7.	Arm Caps: Polyurethane or solid hardwood. 
8.	Outer Back and Seat Cover Inserts: Wood veneer, laminate, other types of pliable material. 
9.	Power System:  UL-approved plug and play electrical system encased in aluminum raceways mounted under to the vertical standards allowing for duplex and USB power connections at each chair. 
10.	Cupholder: Rear Mounted or front Floor Mounted. 
11.	Removable Seat Tandem: 1, 2, or 3 seat configurations. 
12.	Requirements for listing and labeling of products.
J.	Materials: 
1.	Cast Iron: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 25A minimum, free of air holes and casting imperfections, all edges ground smooth. 
2.	Cast Aluminum: ASTM B26/B26M, ASTM B108/B108M, or ASTM B179. 
3.	Sheet Steel: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS) or Drawing Steel (DS) electrogalvanized sheet, 04Z (12G) coating class on both surfaces; chemically treated for baked enamel finish. 
4.	Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M; minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 
5.	Steel Tubes: AISI/SAE1008/1010/1015, ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing; minimum wall thickness of 0.083 inch (2.10 mm). 
6.	Exposed Hardwood: Solid lumber selected for absence of visible defects; as selected from manufacturer's standards. 
7.	Donor, ADA, and Other Plates: Manufacturer's standard seat plates securely fastened to end aisle panels; anodized aluminum finish, with letters and numbers countersunk and filled with black paint. 
8.	Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Type 1, Grade GP 50, nominal thickness 0.050 inch (1.27 mm); colors and patterns as selected from manufacturer's standards. 
9.	Fiberglass: Molded polypropylene material with not less than 30 percent glass fiber reinforcement and integral color pigments. 
10.	Polypropylene Sheet: Molded high-density polypropylene with minimum tensile strength of 3300 psi (23 MPa), integral color pigments, and textured, scuff-resistant surface finish. 
11.	Polyurethane Foam: Density not less than 1.8 lb./cu ft (28.8 kg/cu m), fire retardant, non-hardening, and non-oxidizing, with high resistance to alkalis, oils, moisture, and mildew. 
12.	Upholstery Fabric:
a.	Selected from manufacturer's standard options.
b.	Custom selected option. 
c.	Supplied by customer 
2.22	FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, BRAIL FIRE CURTAIN
A.	Fire Curtain Hoist:
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized brail lift, automatically closing fire safety curtain as indicated on the drawings. The curtain shall fold up above the proscenium arch, and shall lap the wall not less than 18 inch (457 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (610 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with Zetex. D-rings shall be sewn 18 inch (457.2 mm) apart in vertical rows at each lift line location.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of an 8 inch (203.2 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Welded construction shall not be accepted. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 ounces per square yard (0.9 KG/sq m).
8.	Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	Hoist shall consist of a cable drum, coupled to an electric gear motor. Hoist shall have a 1,100lb (500 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet/min (0.13 m/s). The hoist shall be fully enclosed and supplied with a sturdy metal stand or wall brackets.
b.	The cable drum shall be of welded steel construction and carry 75 feet (22.86 m) of 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable. Twin guards shall keep the cable in the drum groove.
c.	The hoist (and curtain) shall be locked in position by the motor brake located within the enclosure. Releasing the fire line shall disengage the motor brake, permitting the cable drum to rotate, lowering the curtain. The brake handle shall extend through the top of the case, for easy attachment to the end of the fire line. No more than 20lbs (9 KG) of tension in the fire line shall be required to hold the full load capacity of the winch.
d.	The unit shall be equipped with an adjustable hydraulic speed governor to provide maximum control and safety in the closing of the fire curtain and to establish the travel time.
e.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor and helical/bevel gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft.
2)	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
f.	Rotary Limit Switch:
1)	Rotary limit switch assembly shall have four independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)	Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)	Switches shall be mounted within the winch base as to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
4)	Rotary limit switches shall be Ravasi.
g.	All components in the hoist shall be fully enclosed. Access panels for adjustment and maintenance shall be removable without removing the hoist from service.
h.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked and reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.	Control Station: Controls, consisting of up and down pushbuttons and an emergency stop switch, are mounted on the motor starter.
10.	Guided Clew: Cable clew shall be cut from 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) minimum steel, with the proper number of holes for proper attachment of turnbuckles for multiple cables. One larger hole for the drive cable shall be so located as to prevent the clew from jamming on its guide cables. Provide two parallel guide cables between the head block and the brail hoist to guide the clew.
11.	Head Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500lb (1.1 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Block shall be grooved for (8) 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
12.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500lb (317 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
13.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet-0 inch (1.54 m) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
16.	Drive Cable: The drive cable between the brail hoist and the clew shall be 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized aircraft cable, attached to the clew using a thimble and two forged cable clips.
17.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. The 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
18.	Half Pipe Clamps:
a.	Pipe clamps shall be made of two strips of 3/16 inch by 2 inch (3.17 mm x 50.8 mm) hot rolled steel formed to almost encompass and clamp the pipe batten leaving the bottom open. Corners shall be rounded.
b.	There shall be a 3/8 inch x 1 inch (9.52 mm x 25.4 mm) hex bolt with lock nut above the batten. A 5/8 inch (15.87 mm) hole in the top of each clamp half allows the attachment of cable, chain, or other fittings.
c.	Half pipe clamps shall have a manufacturer's recommended load rating of at least 200 lbs. (90.7 KG).
2.23	FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, STRAIGHT LIFT CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM OPENING UP TO 18'T x 34'W
A.	Manual (Arbor/Lattice Track):
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a manually operated straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch (152.4 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1.2 m) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 ounces per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
a.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The machined rope and cable grooves shall have equal pitch diameters. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. The turned in leg shall be notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.570 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs. (1,134 KG).
e.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
9.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall be cast iron sheave grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) lift line.
10.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet (610 mm) centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.29 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.	Automatic Floor Block:
a.	The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a groove for a 1 inch (25.4 mm) rope.
b.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter machined steel shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
c.	The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) diameter rods, each equipped with adjustable locking collar to limit sheave travel.
13.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as the fire curtain arbor release, round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.	Hand line:
a.	Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) in diameter, employing a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
b.	The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
c.	The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that shall become visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
d.	The rope shall hold knots well and be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, or moisture damage nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
e.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
f.	Hand lines shall be SureGrip rope.
16.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
17.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
B.	Fire Curtain Hoist:
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 ounces per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	Hoist shall consist of a cable drum, coupled to an electric gear motor. Hoist shall have a 1,100lb (500 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.13 m/s). The hoist shall be fully enclosed and supplied with a sturdy metal stand or wall brackets.
b.	The cable drum shall be of welded steel construction and carry 75 feet (22.86 m) of 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) diameter 7X19 galvanized utility cable. Twin guards shall keep the cable in the drum groove.
c.	The hoist (and curtain) shall be locked in position by the motor brake located within the enclosure. Releasing the fire line shall disengage the motor brake, permitting the cable drum to rotate, lowering the curtain. The brake handle shall extend through the top of the case, for easy attachment to the end of the fire line. No more than 20lbs (9 KG) of tension in the fire line shall be required to hold the full load capacity of the winch.
d.	The unit shall be equipped with an adjustable hydraulic speed governor to provide maximum control and safety in the closing of the fire curtain and to establish the travel time.
e.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor and helical/bevel gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft.
2)	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
f.	Rotary Limit Switch:
1)	Rotary limit switch assembly shall have four independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)	Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)	Switches shall be mounted within the winch base as to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
4)	Rotary limit switches shall be Ravasi.
g.	All components in the hoist shall be fully enclosed. Access panels for adjustment and maintenance shall be removable without removing the hoist from service.
h.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
5)	The fire curtain hoist shall be sized to accommodate the fire curtain and all associated hardware. The hoist shall include a push button control station. Emergency lowering speed shall be controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Hoist shall meet ANSE E1.22 - 2009 "Entertainment Technology Fire Safety Curtain Systems" or NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives - 2007".
9.	Control Station: Controls, consisting of up and down pushbuttons and an emergency stop switch, are mounted on the motor starter.
10.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
11.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six UL listed fusible links that release at 165 degree F (74 degree C), side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
12.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
13.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
C.	Line Shaft Hoist:
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	Line Shaft Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall consist of a gearmotor assembly, a drum for each lift line, and interconnecting shafts. The gearmotor assembly shall include a brake release and a hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released by the activation of the fire line. The hoist shall have a minimum1,400 lb (635 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
c.	Drums.
1)	Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
2)	Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
3)	Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end. Shafts without universal joints are not acceptable.
d.	Rotary Limit Switches:
1)	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have two or four independently adjustable switch/cam sets as required. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)	Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
4)	Switches shall be mounted to the hoist base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
e.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
11.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
12.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
13.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
D.	Traction Drive Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	Traction Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall consist of a traction sheave and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.	The iron or steel sheave shall be a minimum diameter of 40 times cable diameter with V-grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
c.	The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
d.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
e.	Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
f.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
g.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
10.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
13.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5' (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
14.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
15.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
E.	Drum Hoist:
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	Drum Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall be mounted to allow dual drive lines to travel from either side of the fire curtain centerline, over loft blocks and to the hoist drum.
b.	The hoist shall consist of a cable drum and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
c.	The drum shall be a minimum diameter of 30 times cable diameter with helical grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
d.	The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
e.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
f.	Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
g.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
h.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
10.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to permit normal motorized operation of the fire curtain and emergency closure without power.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
13.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
14.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
15.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
2.24	FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, STRAIGHT LIFT CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM OPENING UP TO 22'T x 42'W
A.	Manual (Arbor/Lattice Track):
1.	Product: Model F201m Manual Straight Lift Fire Curtain With Smoke Pocket Roller Guide and Metal Edge Curtain Channel.
2.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a manually operated straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
3.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
4.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
5.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.59 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152.4 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.52 m) and 10 feet (3,04 m) long sections and can be field cut.
6.	Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch (152 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457 mm) steel plate bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (0.61 m) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1.22 m) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
a.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The machined rope and cable grooves shall have equal pitch diameters. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. The turned in leg shall be notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.570 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs. (1,134 KG).
e.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
9.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall be cast iron sheave grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) lift line.
10.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.29 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.	Automatic Floor Block:
a.	The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a groove for a 1 inch (25.4 mm) rope.
b.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter machined steel shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
c.	The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) diameter rods, each equipped with adjustable locking collar to limit sheave travel.
13.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as the fire curtain arbor release, round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.	Hand line:
a.	Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) in diameter, employing a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
b.	The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
c.	The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that shall become visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
d.	The rope shall hold knots well and be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, or moisture damage nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
e.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
f.	Hand lines shall be SureGrip rope.
16.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
17.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
B.	Fire Curtain Hoist:
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
7.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
8.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
9.	Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	Hoist shall consist of a cable drum, coupled to an electric gear motor. Hoist shall have an 1,100lb (500 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.13 m/s). The hoist shall be fully enclosed and supplied with a sturdy metal stand or wall brackets.
b.	The cable drum shall be of welded steel construction and carry 75 feet (22.86 m) of 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) diameter 7X19 galvanized utility cable. Twin guards shall keep the cable in the drum groove.
c.	The hoist (and curtain) shall be locked in position by the motor brake located within the enclosure. Releasing the fire line shall disengage the motor brake, permitting the cable drum to rotate, lowering the curtain. The brake handle shall extend through the top of the case, for easy attachment to the end of the fire line. No more than 20lbs (9 KG) of tension in the fire line shall be required to hold the full load capacity of the winch.
d.	The unit shall be equipped with an adjustable hydraulic speed governor to provide maximum control and safety in the closing of the fire curtain and to establish the travel time.
e.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor and helical/bevel gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft.
2)	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
f.	Rotary Limit Switch:
1)	Rotary limit switch assembly shall have four independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)	Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)	Switches shall be mounted within the winch base as to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
4)	Rotary limit switches shall be Ravasi.
g.	All components in the hoist shall be fully enclosed. Access panels for adjustment and maintenance shall be removable without removing the hoist from service.
h.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
5)	The fire curtain hoist shall be J.R. Clancy Motorized Fire Curtain Hoist.
10.	Control Station: Controls, consisting of up and down pushbuttons and an emergency stop switch, are mounted on the motor starter.
11.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
12.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
13.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
14.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
C.	Line Shaft Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
7.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
8.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
9.	Line Shaft Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall consist of a gearmotor assembly, a drum for each lift line, and interconnecting shafts. The gearmotor assembly shall include a brake release and a hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released by the activation of the fire line. The hoist shall have a minimum1,400 lb (635 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
c.	Drums:
1)	Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
2)	Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
3)	Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end. Shafts without universal joints are not acceptable.
d.	Rotary Limit Switches:
1)	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have two or four independently adjustable switch/cam sets as required. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)	Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
4)	Switches shall be mounted to the hoist base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
e.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
10.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
11.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
12.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
13.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
14.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
D.	Traction Drive Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10' (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
7.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
8.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
9.	Traction Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall consist of a traction sheave and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.	The iron or steel sheave shall be a minimum diameter of 40 times cable diameter with V-grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
c.	The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
d.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
e.	Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
f.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an over travel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the over travel limits for resetting purposes.
g.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
11.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch(12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
12.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
13.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch 50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
16.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
E.	Drum Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.	Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
7.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
8.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
9.	Drum Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall be mounted to allow dual drive lines to travel from either side of the fire curtain centerline, over loft blocks and to the hoist drum.
b.	The hoist shall consist of a cable drum and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
c.	The drum shall be a minimum diameter of 30 times cable diameter with helical grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
d.	The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
e.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
f.	Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
g.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
h.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch 304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch(50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
11.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to permit normal motorized operation of the fire curtain and emergency closure without power.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
12.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
13.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
16.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
2.25	FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, STRAIGHT LIFT CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM OPENING UP TO 30'T x 50'W
A.	Manual (Arbor/Lattice Track).
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a manually operated straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.59 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152.4 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.52 m) and 10 feet (3,04 m) long sections and can be field cut.
5.	Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch (152 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457 mm) steel plate bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (0.61 m) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1.22 m) centers.
6.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
7.	12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
a.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The machined rope and cable grooves shall have equal pitch diameters. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. The turned in leg shall be notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.570 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs. (1,134 KG).
e.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
8.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall be cast iron sheave grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) lift line.
9.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
10.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.29 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
11.	Automatic Floor Block:
a.	The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a groove for a 1 inch (25.4 mm) rope.
b.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter machined steel shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
c.	The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) diameter rods, each equipped with adjustable locking collar to limit sheave travel.
12.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
13.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as the fire curtain arbor release, round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
14.	Hand line:
a.	Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) in diameter, employing a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
b.	The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
c.	The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that shall become visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
d.	The rope shall hold knots well and be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, or moisture damage nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
e.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
f.	Hand lines shall be SureGrip rope.
15.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
16.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
B.	Line Shaft Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have steel wheel roller guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the inside of each smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1.2 m) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	Line Shaft Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall consist of a gearmotor assembly, a drum for each lift line, and interconnecting shafts. The gearmotor assembly shall include a brake release and a hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released by the activation of the fire line. The hoist shall have a minimum1,400 lb (635 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
c.	Drums.
1)	Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
2)	Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
3)	Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end. Shafts without universal joints are not acceptable.
d.	Rotary Limit Switches:
1)	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have two or four independently adjustable switch/cam sets as required. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)	Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
4)	Switches shall be mounted to the hoist base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
e.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
11.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
12.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
13.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
C.	Traction Drive Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070" (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have steel wheel roller guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the inside of each smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	Traction Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall consist of a traction sheave and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.	The iron or steel sheave shall be a minimum diameter of 40 times cable diameter with V-grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
c.	The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
d.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
e.	Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
f.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
11.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
12.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
13.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using pipe clamp.
16.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
D.	Drum Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Sides of curtain shall have steel wheel roller guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.	Metal Edge Channel:
a.	Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.	Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.	Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.	Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the inside of each smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.	Drum Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall be mounted to allow dual drive lines to travel from either side of the fire curtain centerline, over loft blocks and to the hoist drum.
b.	The hoist shall consist of a cable drum and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
c.	The drum shall be a minimum diameter of 30 times cable diameter with helical grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
d.	The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
e.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
f.	Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
g.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
11.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to permit normal motorized operation of the fire curtain and emergency closure without power.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
12.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
13.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
16.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
2.26	FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, STRAIGHT LIFT CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM OPENING GREATER THAN 30'T x 50'W
A.	Line Shaft Hoist:
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (610 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 6 inch (152.4 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Fire Safety Curtain Frame: The fully framed fire safety curtain shall be designed and fabricated to sustain a minimum uniform wind load of 2 psf, or as indicated by code. The attachment of the curtain to the frame shall be made to facilitate future maintenance and repair. The frame shall remain engaged in its guides and operate under the full range of temperatures and wind conditions.
5.	Each side of the curtain frame shall have two bronze guides, securely fastened to the curtain frame.
6.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 ounces per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
7.	Line Shaft Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall consist of a gearmotor assembly, a drum for each lift line, and interconnecting shafts. The gearmotor assembly shall include a brake release and a hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released by the activation of the fire line. The hoist shall have a minimum 1,400lb. (635 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet/min (0.127 m/s).
b.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
c.	Drums:
1)	Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
2)	Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
3)	Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end. Shafts without universal joints are not acceptable.
d.	Rotary Limit Switches:
1)	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have two or four independently adjustable switch/cam sets as required. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)	Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
4)	Switches shall be mounted to the hoist base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
e.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
8.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six UL listed fusible links that release at 165 degree F (74 degree C), side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet-0 inch (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
10.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
11.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
12.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where the chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
13.	Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of an 8 inch (203 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (610 mm) centers. An angle iron, steel track shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guides. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
B.	Traction Drive Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch 457 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (610 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the International Building Code (2015), NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. When the fire line is released, emergency closing shall occur at an average speed between 6 in/sec (152 mm/sec) and 24 in/sec (610 mm/sec) with the last 8 feet (2.4 m) taking more than 5 seconds.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 6 inch (152.4 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Fire Safety Curtain Frame: The fully framed fire safety curtain shall be designed and fabricated to sustain a minimum uniform wind load of 2 psf, or as indicated by code. The attachment of the curtain to the frame shall be made to facilitate future maintenance and repair. The frame shall remain engaged in its guides and operate under the full range of temperatures and wind conditions.
5.	Each side of the curtain frame shall have two bronze guides, securely fastened to the curtain frame.
6.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
7.	Traction Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall consist of a traction sheave and gearmotor assembly. The gearmotor assembly shall consist of a high efficiency gearbox, brake release and hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a lifting capacity sufficient to overcome the out of balance load required to lower the curtain at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.13 m/s).
b.	The sheave shall be a 20 inch (508 mm) diameter iron or steel sheave, with V-grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
c.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
d.	Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Allen Bradley Bulletin 802T or equal.
e.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
8.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 16 inch (406.4 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1,400lb (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall have a cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
10.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (610 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to the wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, UL listed fusible links that release at 165 degree F (74 degree C), side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
a.	Fusible links shall be spaced every 15 feet (4.6 m) along the length of the fire line. A fusible link shall be located no more than 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from the vertical rise of the fire line.
13.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
14.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
15.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where the chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
16.	Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a channel 4 inch (102 mm) deeper than the curtain frame and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. An angle steel track shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guides. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers or as required to support the curtain.
C.	Drum Hoist.
1.	General Description:
a.	Furnish and install a motorized framed type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (610 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.	The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.	The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.	Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.	ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 6 inch(152.4 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.	Fire Safety Curtain Frame: The fully framed fire safety curtain shall be designed and fabricated to sustain a minimum uniform wind load of 2 psf, or as indicated by code. The attachment of the curtain to the frame shall be made to facilitate future maintenance and repair. The frame shall remain engaged in its guides and operate under the full range of temperatures and wind conditions.
5.	Each side of the curtain frame shall have two bronze guides, securely fastened to the curtain frame.
6.	Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
7.	Drum Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.	The hoist shall be mounted to allow dual drive lines to travel from either side of the fire curtain centerline, over loft blocks and to the hoist drum.
b.	The hoist shall consist of a cable drum and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
c.	The drum shall be a minimum diameter of 30 times cable diameter with helical grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
d.	The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
e.	Gearmotor:
1)	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)	Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)	Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
f.	Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
g.	Fixed Speed Starter:
1)	The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)	The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
8.	Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.	Loft Block:
a.	The sheave shall have a 16 inch (406.4 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge(3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1,400lb (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.	Loft blocks shall have a cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
10.	Counterweight Arbor:
a.	Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.	The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.	Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (610 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to the wall.
b.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.	Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six UL listed fusible links that release at 165 degree F (74 degree C), side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
13.	Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a 1/2 inch x 6 inch (12.7 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckle and pipe clamp.
14.	Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
15.	Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where the chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
16.	Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 8 inch (203 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. An angle iron, steel track shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guides. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
2.27	FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, CURTAIN ACCESSORIES
A.	Electrical Fire Line Release:
1.	Product: Sure-Guard II.
2.	The fire curtain shall be equipped with an electro-mechanical fire line release mechanism operated by a Sure-Guard II, activated by normally open or normally closed devices including rate of rise heat detectors, smoke detectors, emergency switches, etc. (furnished and installed by others) or by release of tension in the fire line. A switch shall be mounted in the release mechanism enclosure for testing system operation. Activation of the mechanism shall release tension in the fire line which, in turn, allows the fire curtain arbor to rise and the fire curtain to close in the normal manner. The release unit shall incorporate three pulleys permitting its attachment to the fireline at any point and to help prevent accidental release.
3.	The release shall contain an integral sealed, rechargeable "Gel Pac" battery and charger to provide emergency power during power interruptions. A charged battery shall keep the curtain raised for a half hour minimum without building power. The release shall operate from a 120 VAC power source provided by others.
4.	The electrical fire line release shall be UL Listed.
5.	The fire line release system shall be the Sure-Guard II.
B.	Rate of Rise Heat Detector:
1.	A heat detector that closes a normally open electrical contact at a fixed temperature or at a temperature rise of 15 degree F (9.4 degree C) in one minute.
2.	Rating: 3.0A at 6 to125 VAC, 1.0 A at 6 to 24VAC, 0.3 A 125 VDC, and 0.1 A VDC.
3.	UL/ULC rating temperature - 135 degree F (57.2 degree C).
4.	UL/ULC maximum temperature at ceiling - 100 degree F (37.8 degree C).
C.	Fire Curtain Systems, Heat Resisting Border:
1.	Heat resistant border curtains shall be fabricated from ZetexPlus 800 fabric, rated for 1,500 degree F (815.6C) continuous temperature. The fabric shall be woven from highly texturized silica yarn with a proprietary high temperature treatment, and a weight of 25.5 oz. per square yard.
2.	Borders shall have a sewn hem on all edges, with webbing, grommets, and ties on 12" (304.8 mm) centers on the top edge.
2.28	COUNTERWEIGHT RIGGING
A.	12 inch Nylon Head Block - Upright.
1.	Type: Single Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block.
2.	The sheave shall be filled nylon, with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,360.8 KG).
7.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
B.	12 Inch Cast Iron Head Block - Upright.
1.	Type: Single Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.34m) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,360 KG).
7.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
C.	12 Inch Nylon Head Block - Underhung.
1.	Type: Single Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be filled nylon with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs. (1,134 KG).
7.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
D.	12 Inch Cast Iron Head Block, Underhung.
1.	Type: Single Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,1334 KG).
7.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
E.	16 Inch Cast Iron Head Block - Upright.
1.	Type: Single Purchase 16 inch (406.4 mm) Head block .
2.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 16 inch (406.4 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2-1/2 inch (63.5 mm) x 2 inch (50.4 mm) x 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,600 lbs. (1,633 KG).
7.	Head blocks shall be grooved for eight 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift lines and one 1 inch (25.4 mm) hand line.
F.	16 Inch Cast Iron Head Block - Underhung.
1.	Type: Single Purchase 16 inch (406.4 mm) Head block.
2.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 16 inch (406.4 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2.5 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (63.5 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2.5 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,600 lbs (1,633 KG).
7.	Head blocks shall be grooved for eight 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) lift lines and one 1 inch (25.4 mm) hand line.
G.	12 Inch DP, Nylon Head Block - Upright.
1.	Type: Double Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be filled nylon, with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top sheave are maintained.
6.	Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,7360.8 kg).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
H.	12 Inch DP, Cast Head Block - Upright.
1.	Type: Double Purchase 12 inch (30.48cm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (30.48cm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top sheave are maintained.
6.	Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000lbs (1,360.8 KG).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
I.	12 Inch DP, Nylon Head Block - Underhung.
1.	Type: Double Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be filled nylon with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top sheave are maintained.
6.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,134 KG).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
J.	12 Inch DP, Cast Iron Head Block - Underhung.
1.	Type: Double Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top sheave are maintained.
6.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,134 KG).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
K.	16 Inch DP, Cast Iron Head Block - Upright.
1.	Type: Double Purchase 16 inch (406.4 mm) Head block .
2.	The sheave shall be iron casting with a 16 inch (406.4 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2.5 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (63.5 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,600 lbs (1,633.9 KG).
7.	Head blocks shall be grooved for eight 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) lift lines and one 1 inch (25.4 mm) hand line.
L.	16 Inch DP, Cast Iron Head Block - Underhung.
1.	Type: Double Purchase 16 inch (406 mm) Head block .
2.	The sheave shall be iron casting with a 16 inch (406 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2-1/2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (57 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top are maintained.
6.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2.5 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,600 lbs (1,633 KG).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for eight 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) lift lines and one 1 inch (25.4 mm) hand line.
M.	12 Inch WG, Nylon Head Block - Upright.
1.	Type: Wire Guide 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be filled nylon, with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Blocks used in wire guide systems shall have tie-off points for the guide wires.
6.	Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,360 KG).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
N.	12 Inch WG, Cast Iron Head Block - Upright.
1.	Type: Wire Guide 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Blocks used in wire guide systems shall have tie-off points for the guide wires.
6.	Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,360.8 KG).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
O.	12 Inch WG, Nylon Head Block - Underhung .
1.	Type: Wire Guide 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be filled nylon with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Blocks used in wire guide systems shall have tie-off points for the guide wires.
6.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,134 KG).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
P.	12 Inch WG, Cast Iron Head Block - Underhung.
1.	Type: Wire Guide 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.	The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.	Blocks used in wire guide systems shall have tie-off points for the guide wires.
6.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,134 KG).
8.	Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
Q.	Staggered Sheave Nylon Head Block.
1.	Type: Staggered Sheave Head Block:
2.	The block sheaves shall have 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameters, and shall be filled nylon. Each sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Sheaves shall be spaced in the housing so cables align with the hoist drum grooving to eliminate fleet angles.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle punched with a mounting hole pattern for clip attachment.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheaves. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for strength.
5.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a minimum recommended working load at least equal to the hoist capacity and associated stresses.
7.	Head blocks shall have ___ sheaves grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line each.
R.	Staggered Sheave Cast Iron Head Block.
1.	Type: Staggered Sheave Head Block:
2.	The block sheaves shall be iron castings with 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameters. Each sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Sheaves shall be spaced in the housing so cables align with the hoist drum grooving to eliminate fleet angles.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle punched with a mounting hole pattern for clip attachment.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheaves. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for strength.
5.	Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a minimum recommended working load at least equal to the hoist capacity and associated stresses.
7.	Head blocks shall have sheaves grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line each,.
a.	Number of Sheave Grooves: ______.
S.	8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block.
1.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
T.	8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block.
1.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67 inch) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
U.	8 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block.
1.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67in.) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (227 KG) and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
V.	8 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block.
1.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67in.) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (227 KG) and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
W.	8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block - 2 Line.
1.	Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
5.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
X.	8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block - 2 Line.
1.	Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
5.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
Y.	8 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block - 2 Line.
1.	Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting, with two machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles.
5.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 750 lbs. (340.2 KG) total, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
Z.	8 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block - 2 Line.
1.	Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with two machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles.
5.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 750 lbs. (340.2 KG) total, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AA.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Upright, 4 and 8 Line.
1.	Loft Block - 4 and 8 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles.
5.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG) per line and 1300 lbs. (589.7 KG) total, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for 4 or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AB.	8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung, 4 and 8 Line.
1.	Loft Block - 4 and 8 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
5.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 1300 lbs. (589.7 KG) total, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for 4 or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AC.	12 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block.
1.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch (6.4 mm or 9.52 mm) lift line.
5.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG) for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) cable or 1050 lbs. (476.3 KG) for 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) cable, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
AD.	16 Inch Steel, Universal Loft Block.
1.	The steel sheave shall have a 16 inch (406.4 mm) diameter with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) lift line.
AE.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.	Underhung Loft Block:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
AF.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.	Underhung Loft Block:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
AG.	8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.	Underhung Loft Block:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
AH.	8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.	Underhung Loft Block:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
AI.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 2 Line. 
1.	Underhung Loft Block - 2 Line: 
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon.  The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings 
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cutout to grasp the beam flange. 
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes. 
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm). 
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines. 
AJ.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 2 Line. 
1.	Underhung Loft Block - 2 Line: 
2.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon.  The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings. 
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cutout to grasp the beam flange. 
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes. 
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm). 
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AK.	8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 2 Line.
1.	Underhung Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with two machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cutout to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
7.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AL.	8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 2 Line.
1.	Underhung Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with two machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cutout to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
7.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AM.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 4 and 8 Line.
1.	Underhung Loft Block - 4 and 8 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inch (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG).
7.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for 4 or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AN.	8 inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 4 and 8 Line.
1.	Underhung Loft Block - 4 and 8 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inch (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs (317.5 KG).
7.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for 4 or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AO.	12 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.	Underhung Loft Block:
2.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 675 lbs (306.2 KG).
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch (6.4 mm or 9.52 mm) lift line.
AP.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block.
1.	Underhung Loft Block:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange. 
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes. 
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG). 
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift line. 
AQ.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block. 
1.	Underhung Loft Block: 
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings. 
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange. 
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes. 
5.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG). 
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift line. 
AR.	8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block. 
1.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift line.
AS.	8 inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung - 8LN.
1.	Underhung Loft Block - 8 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inch (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.	The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.45 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs (317.5 KG).
7.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for eight, 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift lines.
AT.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Upright, 8LN.
1.	Loft Block - 8 Line:
2.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.763 mm) angle.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles.
5.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 1300 lbs. (598.7 KG) total load, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for eight, 3/16 inch (4.763 mm) lift lines.
AU.	Idler Assemblies.
1.	Loft block idlers shall be provided to carry the weight of the cables and prevent rubbing against adjacent block side plates. They shall not be installed to carry line loads or to act as deflector or mule blocks.
2.	Idler assemblies shall consist of one or two 3-1/2 inch (88.9 mm) diameter, 3-line filled ABS idler pulleys mounted on the side of the loft block housing.
3.	The sheaves shall have 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) cable grooves and two sealed, precision ball bearings and shall ride on a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) shaft inserted through the block housing.
4.	A 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter bail shall mount in the housing and captivate the cables in the grooves.
5.	All nuts shall be of the nylon insert self-locking type.
AV.	Pivot Bracket.
1.	Pivot brackets mount loft blocks to beams with more than 1-1/2 degrees of slope.
2.	They consist of a pair of angles that bolt to the block base angles and a matching pair of angles that mount to the beam with clips. A 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) diameter threaded rod connects the two sets of angle to provide a hinge point.
AW.	8 Inch Cast Iron Mule Block - 1 and 2 Line.
1.	8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 1 and 2 Line.
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two, sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.	Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) structural steel channel or a 3 gage (6.2 mm) formed channel base. Brace tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.8 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the channel base for added strength.
6.	There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.	The block shall have a recommended working load maximum of 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line.
8.	Mule blocks shall be grooved for one or two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lines.
AX.	8 Inch Cast Iron Mule Block - 1 and 2 Line.
1.	8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 1 and 2 Line.
2.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.	Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) structural steel channel or a 3 gage (6.2 mm) formed channel base. Brace tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.8 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the channel base for added strength.
6.	There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.	The block shall have a recommended working load maximum of 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line.
8.	Mule blocks shall be grooved for one or two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lines.
AY.	8 Inch Cast Iron Mule Block - 4 and 8 Line.
1.	8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 4 and 8 Line.
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with machined grooves.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.	Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) structural steel channel or a 3 gauge (6.2 mm) formed channel base. Brace tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the channel base for added strength.
6.	There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line with a total load not to exceed 2000 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (635.0 kg) using a 180 degree wrap.
8.	Mule blocks shall be grooved for four or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lines.
AZ.	12 Inch Cast Iron Mule Block.
1.	12 inch (304.8 mm) Mule Blocks:
2.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.	Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203 mm) structural steel channel or a 3 gauge (6.2 mm) formed channel base. Brace tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the channel base for added strength.
6.	There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG) per line.
8.	Total load of a one line block shall not exceed 700 lbs. (317.5 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 700 lbs. (317.5 KG) using a 180 degree wrap.
9.	Total load of a two line block shall not exceed 1400 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 180 degree wrap.
10.	Total load of a four line block shall not exceed 2000 lbs. (408.23 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 180 degree wrap.
11.	Total load of a four line block shall not exceed 2000 lbs. (408.23 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 180 degree wrap.
12.	Mule blocks shall be grooved for 1, 2, 4, or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lines.
BA.	8 Inch Nylon Mule Block - 2 Line.
1.	8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 1 and 2 Line.
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (209.55 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two, sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.	Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) formed steel channel base. Bracing tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the base for added strength.
6.	There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 875 lbs. (385.55 KG) per line. Total load not to exceed 1750 lbs. (793.8 KG) for a 90 degree wrap and 1400 lbs. (635.0 KG) for a 180 degree wrap.
8.	Mule blocks shall be grooved for one or two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) or 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lines.
BB.	8 Inch Nylon Mule Block - 2 Line.
1.	8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 1 and 2 Line.
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (209.55 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.	Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) formed steel channel base. Bracing tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the base for added strength.
6.	There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 875 lbs. (385.55 KG) per line. Total load not to exceed 1750 lbs. (793.8 KG) for a 90 degree wrap and 1400 lbs. (635.0 KG) for a 180 degree wrap.
8.	Mule blocks shall be grooved for one or two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) or 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lines.
BC.	8 Inch Nylon Mule Block - 4 and 8 Line.
1.	8 inch (203.2 mm) Mule Block.
2.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (209.55 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.	Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) formed steel channel base. Bracing tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the base for added strength.
6.	There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.525 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 875 lbs. (396.9 KG) per 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) line and 525 lbs. (238.1 KG) per 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) line with a total load not to exceed 2000 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (635.0 kg) using a 180 degree wrap.
8.	Mule blocks shall be series grooved for four or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) or 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lines.
BD.	Swivel Stand.
1.	The stand consists of a heavy pipe welded to a braced base plate. The plate may be punched for temporary attachment bolts but the base will be welded to the building structure after final alignment.
2.	A swivel is factory welded to mule block. It shall have a tube at one end that fits over the vertical stand member and swivels for alignment. Bolts are for alignment but all connections shall be welded after alignment.
BE.	Mule Stand.
1.	The stand shall consist of a steel frame that is elevated to the required height and tilted to adjust the mule to the proper angle. The frame may be punched for temporary attachment bolts but the base will be welded to the building structure after final alignment.
BF.	J-Guide System.
1.	Vertical J's shall be 1-3/4 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) extruded aluminum members.
2.	J-guides shall be held in place by extruded aluminum clips, which are bolted to the wall battens. The clips and J-guide shall be formed so that they lock together in accurate alignment. There shall be no need for holes or slots in the J-guides.
3.	Horizontal wall battens shall be located on centers not to exceed 5 feet (1524 mm). Wall battens shall be 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm steel angles with factory punched holes on 2 inch (50.8 mm) centers to allow J-guides to be located on 6 inch, 8 inch (152.4 mm, 203.2 mm) or other centers. (Locations with high seismic activity may require different batten spacing or sizes.).
4.	Wall battens shall be held in place by adjustable wall knees, consisting of a 5/16 inch x 1.5 inch (7.93 mm x 38.1 mm) steel knee and an 11 gauge (3.18 mm) 1 inch x 2 inch (25.4 mm x 50.8 mm) formed, slotted channel to aid in alignment made necessary by irregularities in the wall.
5.	There shall be a top stop batten, a bottom stop batten and a floor batten, all of which shall be made of 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angle. The top and bottom stop battens shall each have a 2 inch x 2 inch (50 mm x 50 mm) hardwood bumper securely bolted to the stop battens by 1/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch (6.4 mm x 63.5 mm) carriage bolts, nuts, and washers.
6.	All other members of the J-guide system shall be assembled using 5/16 inch (7.93 mm) hex head bolts, lock nuts and washers.
BG.	A-Guide System.
1.	The A-guides shall be 3.5 inch deep x 2 inch wide x 3/16 inch (88.9 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) wall extruded aluminum members.
2.	A-guides shall be held in place by extruded aluminum clips on each leg of the guide. The clips are bolted to the wall battens. The clips and A-guide shall be formed so that they lock together in accurate alignment. There shall be no need for holes or slots in the A-guides.
3.	Horizontal wall battens shall be located on centers not to exceed 5ft (1.52 mm). (Locations with high seismic activity may require different spacing or sizes.) Wall battens shall be 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angles with factory punched holes on 2 inch (50.8 mm) centers to allow A-guides to be located on 6 inch, 8 inch (152.4 mm x 203.2 mm) or other centers.
4.	Wall battens shall be held in place by adjustable wall knees, consisting of a 5/16 inch x 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) steel knee and an 11 gauge (3.18 mm) 1 inch x 2 inch (25.4 mm x 50.8 mm) formed, slotted channel to aid in alignment made necessary by irregularities in the wall.
5.	There shall be a top stop batten, a bottom stop batten and a floor batten, all of which shall be made of 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angle. The top and bottom stop battens shall each have a 2 inch x 2 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm) hardwood bumper faced with 1/4 inch x 2 inch (6.4 mm x 50.8 mm) neoprene securely bolted to the stop battens by 1/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch (6.4 mm x 63.5 mm) carriage bolts, nuts, and washers.
6.	All other members of the A-guide system shall be assembled using 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) hex head bolts, lock nuts and washers.
BH.	T-Guide System.
1.	Vertical T-bars shall be 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x4.76 mm) steel members with factory punched mounting holes and slots.
2.	T-bars shall be held in place and properly spaced by "U" shaped spreader plates formed from 1 inch x 3/16 inch (25.4 mm x 4.76 mm) steel, which are bolted to the wall battens.
3.	Horizontal wall battens shall be located on centers not to exceed 5 feet (1524 mm). Wall battens shall be 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angles with factory punched holes on 2 inch (50.5 mm) centers to allow J-guides to be located on 6 inch, 8 inch (152.4 mm, 203.2 mm) or other centers. (Locations with high seismic activity may require different batten spacing or sizes.).
4.	Wall battens shall be held in place by adjustable wall knees, consisting of a 5/16 inch x 1.5 inch (7.93 mm x 38.1 mm) steel knee and an 11 gauge (3.18 mm) 1 inch x 2 inch (25.4 mm x 50.8 mm) formed, slotted channel to aid in alignment made necessary by irregularities in the wall.
5.	There shall be a top stop batten, a bottom stop batten and a floor batten, all of which shall be made of 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angle. The top and bottom stop battens shall each have a 2 inch x 2 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm) hardwood bumper securely bolted to the stop battens by 1/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch (6.35 mm x 63.5 mm) carriage bolts, nuts, and washers.
6.	All other members of the T-bar system shall be assembled using 5/16 inch (7.93 mm) hex head bolts, lock nuts and washers.
BI.	Arbor: FrontLoader Front Loading Arbor - Single Purchase.
1.	Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer. 
2.	The arbor shall be comprised of a series of sloped shelves within individually accessible compartments at 24 inch (6100 mm) increments. 
3.	Each arbor compartment shall be designed to accommodate ANSI E1.4.1 compliant counterweight bricks 13-3/4 inches (349 mm) deep. 
4.	Arbor models available shall include for 6 inch (152 mm) wide bricks with a minimum guide spacing of 8 inches (203 mm) center to center, and models for 4 inch (102 mm) wide bricks with a minimum guide spacing of 6 inches (152 mm) center to center based on project requirements. 
5.	Arbor heights available shall include 6 feet (1829 mm) tall, 8 feet (2438 mm) tall, or 10 feet (3048 mm) tall (nominal) based on project requirements. 
6.	Compartment latching mechanism shall be a two stage rotary latch system designed to comply with the strength requirements of SAE J839 and FMVSS 206. 
7.	The pivot axial load shall meet or exceed 120 lb-in (13.55 N-m) torque. 
8.	Arbor housing shall be constructed of formed 12-gauge steel sheet. 
9.	Arbor gates shall be constructed of resistance welded bar in a grid (mesh) configuration. 
10.	Each 24 inch (6100 mm) tall (nominal) arbor gate shall be attached onto the arbor with two hinges rated for a minimum of 400 lbs (181 kg) hanging static load each. 
BJ.	Arbor: FrontLoader Front Loading Arbor - Double Purchase. 
1.	Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer. 
2.	The arbor shall be comprised of a series of sloped shelves within individually accessible compartments at 24 inch (6100 mm) increments. 
3.	Each arbor compartment shall be designed to accommodate ANSI E1.4.1 compliant counterweight bricks 13-3/4 inches (349 mm) deep. 
4.	Arbor models available shall include for 6 inch (152 mm) wide bricks with a minimum guide spacing of 8 inches (203 mm) center to center, and models for 4 inch (102 mm) wide bricks with a minimum guide spacing of 6 inches (152 mm) center to center based on project requirements. 
5.	Arbor heights available shall include 6 feet (1829 mm) tall, 8 feet (2438 mm) tall, or 10 feet (3048 mm) tall (nominal) based on project requirements. 
6.	Compartment latching mechanism shall be a two stage rotary latch system designed to comply with the strength requirements of SAE J839 and FMVSS 206. 
7.	The pivot axial load shall meet or exceed 120 lb-in (13.55 N-m) torque. 
8.	Arbor housing shall be constructed of formed 12-gauge steel sheet. 
9.	Arbor gates shall be constructed of resistance welded bar in a grid (mesh) configuration. 
10.	Each 24 inch (6100 mm) tall (nominal) arbor gate shall be attached onto the arbor with two hinges rated for a minimum of 400 lbs (181 kg) hanging static load each. 
BK.	Arbor: J/T-Guide Single Purchase Arbor. 
1.	Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.	The arbor top shall be a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate formed into a channel with 3 inch (76 mm) sides and punched to receive 8 cables. A bolt and spacer shall tie the legs together and provide a tie-off point for the hand line. The front of the arbor top shall carry a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) high white set number.
3.	The arbor bottom shall be of similar construction, with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts.
4.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch steel arbor rods and a 3/8 inch x 3 inch (9.5 mm x 76 mm) steel back plate. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
5.	Two guide assemblies shall be provided, each comprised of UHMW plates between steel backup plates or molded plastic shoe assemblies with stiffening ribs and lock tabs, secured to the arbor by means of two 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hex head bolts and lock nuts.
6.	Provide 12-gauge (2.78 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 foot centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. The front retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
7.	Provide labels on the steel back plates showing the proper locations for the spreader plates.
BL.	Arbor: J/T- Guide Single Purchase Arbor (Seismic).
1.	Spreader plates shall be captured by the arbor rods and the back bar. They are located as normal with additional plates added inside at the arbor top and bottom. The top and bottom plates are held in place using the inner arbor rod nuts.
2.	The spreader plates are 7 Ga. (4.7 mm) thick minimum and notched to ride around the edges of tee or J-guides without rubbing. This keeps the arbors attached to the guides, even if the arbor guide shoes are damaged during a seismic event.
3.	The bottom spreader plate shall be equipped with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts.
BM.	Arbor: J/T-Guide Double Purchase Arbor.
1.	Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. These shall enclose an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter cast sheave with grooves as required. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.	The arbor bottom shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 10 gauge (3.57 mm) formed side plates, with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts. The side plates shall enclose an 8" (203.2 mm) outside diameter cast sheave with a groove for a 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods and a 3/8 inch x 3 inch (9.52 mm x 76.2 mm) steel back plate. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
5.	Two guide assemblies shall be provided, each comprised of UHMW plates between steel backup plates or molded plastic shoe assemblies with stiffening ribs and lock tabs, secured to the arbor by means of two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex head bolts and lock nuts.
6.	Provide 12-gauge (2.78 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2ft (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. The front retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
7.	Provide labels on the steel back plates showing the proper locations for the spreader plates.
BN.	Locking Rail: J/T-Guide Locking Rail.
1.	Rope locks and index cards shall be mounted on a formed steel angle no smaller than 3-1/2 inch x 5 inch x 1/4 inch (88.9 mm x 127 mm x 6.4 mm).
2.	The onstage edge of the rail shall be sloped and punched to receive formed clips which hold index cards centered on the installed sets. Provide one numbered plastic write-on card for each installed set.
3.	Stanchions made from 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) flat bar shall be provided on 5 feet (1.52m) (maximum) centers.
4.	The entire locking rail shall be designed and installed to withstand a minimum up load of 500 pounds per foot (226.8 KG per 304.8 mm) per AISC standards.
BO.	Locking Rail: J/T-Guide, DP Locking Rail.
1.	Rope locks and index cards shall be mounted on a formed steel angle no smaller than 3-1/2 inch x 5 inch x 1/4 inch (88.9 mm x 127 mm x 6.35 mm).
2.	The onstage edge of the rail shall be sloped and punched to receive formed clips which hold index cards centered on the installed sets. Provide one numbered plastic write-on card for each installed set.
3.	Stanchions made from 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) flat bar shall be provided on 5 feet (1.52m) (maximum) centers.
4.	A 3 inch X 2 inch X 1/4 inch (76.2 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle located on the rear of the stanchions shall be punched and furnished with anchor shackles for tying off the ends of the double purchased handlines.
5.	The entire locking rail shall be designed and installed to withstand a minimum up load of 500 pounds per foot (226.8 KG per 304.8 mm) per AISC standards.
BP.	Locking Rail: Gallery Locking Rail.
1.	Rope locks and index cards shall be mounted on a formed steel angle no smaller than 3-1/2 inch x 5 inch x 1/4 inch (88.9 mm x 127 mm x 6.4 mm).
2.	The onstage edge of the rail shall be sloped and punched to receive formed clips which hold index cards centered on the installed sets. Provide one numbered plastic write-on card for each installed set.
3.	Stanchions made from 2 inch (50.8 mm) steel square tube shall be provided on 5 feet (1.54m) (maximum) centers. They shall be long enough to anchor to the edge of the gallery. A continuous 3 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (76.2 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angle shall help anchor the rail to the gallery and serve as a kick rail. Expanded metal mesh shall be provided between the stanchions.
BQ.	Outrigger Brackets:
1.	Angle iron outrigger brackets shall be made of 3/16 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch (4.76 mm x 44.45 mm x 44.45 mm) angle and spaced not more than 10ft (304.8 mm) apart. The brackets shall be attached to the wall battens of the arbor guide system so that the batten is located 10ft (304.8 mm) above the gallery or stage floor. The brackets shall include clamps for attaching the batten.
2.	The outrigger batten shall be made from 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) I.D., schedule 40 pipe extending the full length of the locking rail. Specifications are the same as other battens.
BR.	Compensating Chain System:
1.	A compensating chain system shall be provided to balance the transfer of weight of the lift lines from the batten to the arbor as counterweight sets are raised and lowered.
2.	Roller chain is attached to the bottom of the arbor and to a T-Bar wall batten at the midpoint of the T-Bar battery. The T-Bars are spaced away from the wall battens so the chain travels in the space between the arbor back bars and the wall battens. Size the chain so that weight is added to the arbor to balance the cable weight added to the batten as the batten is lowered.
BS.	Floor Block: Tension Floor Block.
1.	10 inch (254 mm) Tension Floor Block:
2.	The cast iron sheave shall have a 10 inch (254 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch (4.67 mm) steel plate.
5.	The block shall have a minimum weight of 40 lbs. (18.1 KG) to properly tension the hand line.
6.	A plastic kick tab shall be provided for adjustment of the rope tension.
7.	The floor block shall be held in place and guided in the T-bar, J-bar, or A-bar guides by two guide shoe assemblies, each consisting of two guides and one spacer made of 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) thick steel plates. Each guide shall be secured to the housing by means of two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex head bolts and nuts.
BT.	Floor Block: Tension Floor Block.
1.	12 inch (304.8 mm) Tension Floor Block:
2.	The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) rope.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch (4.763 mm) steel plate.
5.	The block shall have a minimum weight of 48 lbs. (21.8 KG) to properly tension the hand line.
6.	A plastic kick tab shall be provided for adjustment of the rope tension.
7.	The floor block shall be held in place and guided in the T-bar, J-bar, or A-bar guides by two guide shoe assemblies, each consisting of two guides and one spacer made of 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) thick steel plates. Each guide shall be secured to the housing by means of two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex head bolts and nuts.
BU.	Wire Guide - Arbor.
1.	Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
3.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
4.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
5.	The top and bottom shall have smoothed and rounded 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) holes for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter guide wires located on 15 inch (381 mm) centers.
6.	Provide 12-gauge (2.78 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2ft (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. The front retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
7.	The arbor shall be guided by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) diameter wire ropes when installed. The guides shall be tensioned with turnbuckles tightened to prevent excessive play in the arbor travel but not so tight as to over stress the attachment points of the cables.
BV.	Wire Guide - Locking Rail.
1.	Rope locks and index cards shall be mounted on a formed steel angle no smaller than 3-1/2 inch x 5 inch x 1/4 inch (88.9 mm x 127 mm x 6.4 mm).
2.	The onstage edge of the rail shall be sloped and punched to receive formed clips which hold plastic write-on index cards centered on the installed sets. Provide one numbered plastic write-on card for each installed set.
3.	Stanchions made from 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) flat bar and 3 inch (76.2 mm) channel shall be provided on 5 feet (1.52m) (maximum) centers. A 4 inch (101.6 mm) Channel shall be mounted along the stanchions to provide a lower bumper for wire guided counterweight arbors.
4.	Two angles on the stanchions shall be provided to support 855M floor blocks.
5.	The entire locking rail shall be designed and installed to withstand a minimum up load of 500 pounds per foot (226.8 KG per 304.8 mm) per AISC standards.
BW.	Floor Block: Nylon Wire Guide Floor Block.
1.	The sheave shall have an 8 inch (203.2 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave.
4.	Base angles shall incorporate tie off points for guide wires.
BX.	Floor Block: Wire Guide Floor Block.
1.	The sheave shall have an 8 inch (203.2 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) rope. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
3.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
4.	Base angles shall incorporate tie off points for guide wires.
BY.	Floor Block: Nylon Fixed Combination Floor Block.
1.	The sheave shall have an 8 inch (203.2 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
3.	The included rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over a tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in its closed position. There shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened.
4.	Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
5.	The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock. The outer end of the handle shall be slotted to accommodate a safety padlock.
6.	The rope lock and floor block shall be mounted to a 1/2 inch x 4 inch (12.7 mm x 101.6 mm) formed steel frame, which incorporates tie off points for guide wires.
BZ.	Floor Block: Fixed Combination Floor Block.
1.	The sheave shall have an 8 inch (203.2 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave.
3.	The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in its closed position. There shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened.
4.	Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
5.	The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock. The outer end of the handle shall be slotted to accommodate a safety padlock.
6.	The rope lock and floor block shall be mounted to a 1/2 inch x 4 inch (12.7 mm x 101.6 mm) formed steel frame, which incorporates tie off points for guide wires.
CA.	Floor Block: Adjustable Combination Floor Block.
1.	The sheave shall have a 10 inch (254 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. The shaft shall be fitted with a locking handle, allowing the sheave to be moved to adjust rope tension. 
2.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, shall fully enclose the sheave, and shall have a slot allowing a minimum of 5 inch (1.52m) of sheave position adjustment.
3.	The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in its closed position. There shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened.
4.	Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
5.	The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock. The outer end of the handle shall be slotted to accommodate a safety padlock.
6.	The rope lock and floor block shall be mounted to a 1/2 inch x 4 inch (12.7 mm x 101.6 mm) formed steel frame, which incorporates tie off points for guide wires.
CB.	Floor Block: Adjustable Combination Floor Block.
1.	The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. The shaft shall be fitted with a locking handle, allowing the sheaved to be moved a minimum of 5 inch (1.52m) to adjust rope tension.
2.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, shall fully enclose the sheave, and shall have a slot allowing a minimum of 8 inch (203.2 mm) of sheave position adjustment.
3.	The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in is closed position. There shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened.
4.	Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
5.	The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock. The outer end of the handle shall be slotted to accommodate a safety padlock.
6.	The rope lock and floor block shall be mounted to a 1/2 inch x 4 inch (12.7 mm x 101.6 mm) formed steel frame, which incorporates tie off points for guide wires.
CC.	Lattice Track Arbor.
1.	Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.	The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
3.	The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
4.	The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
5.	The top and bottom shall have UHMW or bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
6.	Provide 12-gauge (2.78 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet-0 inch (610 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
CD.	Bottom Bracket: Lattice Track and Bracket.
1.	Lattice Track:
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angles opposing each other with 1/4 inch x 2 inch (6.35 mm x 50.8 mm) formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet-0 inch (50.8 mm) centers. Back brackets shall contain two, 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for anchorage to wall.
b.	All connections shall be made with 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
2.	Lattice Track Bracket: 
a.	A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice track. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
CE.	Bottom Bracket: Lattice Track and Spring Bracket. 
1.	Lattice Track: 
a.	The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with 1/4 inch x 2 inch (6.35 mm x 50.8 mm) formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 inch (50.8 mm) centers. Back brackets shall contain two, 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for anchorage to wall. 
b.	All connections shall be made with 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
2.	Lattice Track Spring Bracket:
a.	A fabricated steel bracket with integral compression springs shall support the bottom of the lattice track, prevent abrupt stops, and limit arbor travel. The springs shall be braced and guarded for safety. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
CF.	Floor Block: Sliding Tension Block.
1.	12 inch (304.8 mm) Sliding Tension Block:
2.	The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) rope.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.	The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) diameter rods.
CG.	Floor Block: Sliding Tension Block.
1.	16 inch (406.4 mm) Tension Block:
2.	The cast iron sheave shall have a 16 inch (406.4 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 1 inch (25.4 mm) rope.
3.	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two, tapered roller bearings.
4.	The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) diameter rods, each equipped with adjustable locking collar to limit sheave travel.
5.	The sliding tension block shall be J.R. Clancy No. 6CR-1618.
CH.	Single Circuit: Index Light.
1.	Each index light unit shall consist of a sheet steel housing containing lamp sockets mounted 24 inch (609.6 mm) apart and wired on a single circuit with leads and junction box at either end. Sockets shall be suitable for 60 Watt, type 'A' lamps.
2.	Units shall be constructed so as to light the locking rail and prevent light from spilling on stage. The exterior of the index strip light shall be painted a matte black; the interior shall be white. Units shall be supplied in five and ten foot sections.
3.	Index strip lights shall be UL Listed.
CI.	Dual Circuit: Index Light - 2 Circuits.
1.	Each index light unit shall consist of a sheet steel housing containing lamp sockets mounted 12 inch (304.8 mm) apart and wired alternately on two circuits with leads and junction box at either end. Sockets shall be suitable for 60 Watt, type 'A' lamps.
2.	Units shall be constructed so as to light the locking rail and prevent light from spilling on stage. The exterior of the index strip light shall be painted a matte black; the interior shall be white. Units shall be supplied in five and ten foot sections.
3.	Index strip lights shall be UL Listed.
CJ.	Rope Lock.
1.	The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in its closed position.
2.	In order to reduce noise during operation, there shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened. The dogs that grip the rope shall be machined to fit closely to reduce noise and not use washers.
3.	Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.9 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
4.	The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line.
5.	A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock.
6.	The rope lock shall mount to the locking rail with four 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
CK.	SureLock Rope Lock.
1.	In order to reduce the possibility of accidents caused by out of balance sets, the rope lock shall not open if there is an out of balance condition exceeding 50 lbs. (23 KG) in either direction. A visual indicator shall be provided on the front of the unit showing if the set is balanced, batten heavy, or arbor heavy.
2.	The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. There shall be rubber bumpers in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened. The body of the rope lock shall accommodate a padlock, securing the handle in the closed position.
3.	Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
4.	The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder, or vinyl dip, coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. The cam at the lower end of the handle shall be equipped with a steel roller to eliminate sliding friction and promote ease of use.
5.	A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock.
6.	The rope lock shall mount to the locking rail with four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
CL.	EuroLock Rope Lock. 
1.	The rope lock shall consist of two steel side plates, two fixed tension wheels, and one tension wheel that translates horizontally as the handle using the handle.  
2.	The handle shall include latching mechanism that automatically latches when the handle closes. 
3.	Adjustment for rope shall be from 3/4 inch to 1 inch (19.05 mm to 25.4 mm). 
4.	The rope lock shall mount to the locking rail with four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
CM.	Pipe Batten.
1.	All battens shall be 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) nominal diameter, schedule 40 pipe in lengths as shown on the drawings or Bill of Materials. All joints shall be spliced with 18 inch (457.2 mm) long sleeves with 9 inch (228.6 mm) extending into each pipe and held by two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint.
2.	Each end shall be covered with a bright yellow, closed end, soft vinyl safety cap at least 4 inch (101.6 mm) in length.
CN.	Truss Battens.
1.	Two pipe truss battens shall be in lengths as shown on the drawings or Bill of Materials. Truss battens shall be formed from two 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) nominal diameter, schedule 40 pipes, spaced 12 inch (304.8 mm) apart by 1/4 inch by 2 inch (6.4 mm x 50.8 mm) flat bars located a maximum of 5 ft (1.52m) apart and welded between the pipes. All joints shall be spliced with 18 inch (457.2 mm) long sleeves with 9 inch (228.6 mm) extending into each pipe and held by two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint.
2.	Each end shall be covered with a bright yellow, closed end, soft vinyl safety cap at least 4 inch (101.6 mm) in length.
CO.	Turnbuckles and Pipe Clamp.
1.	Turnbuckles: Turnbuckles.
a.	Turnbuckles shall be drop forged and galvanized, and conform to ASTM F-1145 Type 1, Grade 1 standard. Turnbuckles shall be moused after adjustment to prevent loosening.
2.	Pipe Clamps: Pipe Clamps.
a.	Full Pipe Clamps:
b.	Pipe clamps shall be made of two strips of 12 Ga. (2.780 mm) by 2 inch (50.8 mm) hot rolled steel formed to encompass and clamp the pipe batten to prevent its rotation. Corners shall be rounded.
c.	There shall be a 3/8 inch x 1 inch (9.525 mm x 25.4 mm) hex bolt with lock nut above and below the batten. A 5/8 inch (15.875 mm) hole in the top of each clamp half allows the attachment of cable, chain, or other fittings.
d.	Full pipe clamps shall have a manufacturer's recommended load rating of at least 750 lbs (340.2 KG).
CP.	Trim Chains: Trim Chains.
1.	Trim chains shall be 36 inch (914.4 mm) long, made of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) plated, grade 30 Proof Coil chain. Connection between the end link and the lifting cable shall be made with a thimble and copper Nicopress sleeve. Chains shall be wrapped one and one half turns around the batten and attached back to the thimble at the end of the lift line with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) forged shackle. Adjustment is made by connecting the shackle into a link along the return side of the chain.
2.	Trim chains shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs (340 KG).
CQ.	Trim Chains: Alloy Trim Chains.
1.	Trim chains shall be 36 inch (914 mm) long, made of 7 mm, Grade 63, hardened alloy chain meeting OSHA 1910.184(e)(5). The chain shall have a RWL of 3,250 lbs(1,474 KG), shall be manufactured in the United States and have a black finish to eliminate glare. Each link is marked with the manufacturer's code and every 10th link has date code for traceability.
2.	Connection between the end link and the lifting cable shall be made with a thimble and copper Nicopress sleeve.
3.	Chains shall be wrapped one and one half turns around the batten and attached back to the thimble at the end of the lift line with a 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch (6.4 mm to 9.5 mm) forged shackle. Adjustment is made by connecting the forged shackle into a link along the return side of the chain.
4.	Trim chains shall have a recommended working load of at least 750lbs (340.2 KG). when attached to 1/4 inch(6.4 mm), 7x19 GUC.
CR.	Batten Trim Plate:
1.	Screw Pin Shackles: Shackles are u-shaped fittings with holes at each end to accommodate a pin to connect a rope, cable, or chain to another device. The pin has a head at one end and a thread at the other that screws into the body of the shackle. Shackle shall be from a U.S. manufacturer, and shall be moused after final trim adjustment.
2.	Trim Plate Assembly: Trim plate assembly consists of a batten clamp and plate punched with holes to receive 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hardware, and 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) screw pin shackles.
a.	The plate shall be punched with five trim holes and one pick point hole to receive 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hardware.
b.	The trim holes shall be positioned to allow for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) variations in trim height.
c.	Trim plate assembly shall be able to support up to 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per pick point.
d.	Trim plate assembly shall have the ability to be adjusted without the use of tools.
CS.	Batten Trim Clamp:
1.	Batten trim clamps shall consist of two pipe clamps, each made of two strips of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) by 2" (50.8 mm) hot rolled steel formed to encompass and clamp the pipe batten to prevent its rotation. Corners shall be rounded. There shall be a 3/8" x 1" (9.52 mm x 25.4 mm) hex bolt with lock nut above and below the batten. A 5/8" hole (15.87 mm) in the top of one clamp half allows the attachment of cable, chain, or other fittings. The other clamp shall be fitted with a Nylon or aluminum grooved spacer with a minimum 2" (50.8 mm) diameter.
2.	Line adjustment shall be made by loosening the end clamp and sliding it along the batten or by adjusting the turnbuckle if so equipped.
3.	Trim clamps shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG).
CT.	Lift Cables:
1.	All lift cables shall be 7 x 19 construction, galvanized utility cable, sized as required, and with breaking strengths as follows:
a.	1/8 inch (3.17 mm) diameter - 2,000 lbs. (907 KG).
b.	3/16 inch (4.77 mm) diameter - 4,200 lbs. (1,905 KG).
c.	1/4 inch (6.35 mm) diameter - 7,000 lbs. (3,175 KG).
d.	5/16 inch (7.94 mm) diameter - 9,800 lbs. (4445 KG).
e.	3/8 inch (9.52 mm) diameter - 14,400 lbs. (6,532 KG).
2.	Damaged or deformed cable shall not be used. All wire rope rigging shall be installed so as to prevent abrasion of the wire rope against any part of the building construction or other equipment.
CU.	Cable Fittings:
1.	Cable clips shall conform to wire rope manufacturer's recommendations as to size, number, and method of installation. Clips shall be drop forged, made in the United States per Federal Specification FF-C-450, Type 1, Class 1. Under no circumstances may malleable cable clips be used in suspension or lifting lines.
2.	Swaged sleeve fittings shall be copper Nicopress. Aluminum sleeves are not permitted. Swaged fittings shall be installed per the fitting manufacturer's instructions, using the appropriate tools, and checked with the appropriate Nicopress "Go - No go" gauge.
3.	Eyes shall be formed over galvanized steel, wire rope thimbles of correct size. It is grooved to support the rope or cable and prevent kinking and deformation.
4.	Anchor shackles are u-shaped fittings with holes at each end to accommodate a pin used to connect a rope, cable, or chain to another device or hanging point. The pin has a head at one end and a cotter pin at the other end, a thread that screws into the body of the shackle, or a thread, nut and cotter pin at the other end.
CV.	Counterweight:
1.	Standard 4 Inch Counterweight:
a.	Counterweights shall be 4 inches wide x 13 3/4 inches (349.25 mm) long, with U-shaped cutouts for the arbor rods.  Counterweights shall be flame or laser cut steel.  Each piece shall be free from slag and sharp edges. The thickness of counterweights shall not vary more than 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) from nominal dimension.
b.	Opposite corners shall be notched for ease of handling. Alternate weights when stacking to provide finger holds when loading arbors.
c.	Provide 25 percent of weight 2 inches (50.8 mm) thick and 75 percent of weight 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick for ease of balancing.
2.	Standard 6 Inch Counterweight:
a.	Counterweights shall be 6 inches wide x 13 3/4 inches (349.25 mm) long, with U-shaped cutouts for the arbor rods.  Counterweights shall be flame or laser cut steel.  Each piece shall be free from slag and sharp edges. The thickness of counterweights shall not vary more than 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) from nominal dimension.
b.	Opposite corners shall be notched for ease of handling. Alternate weights when stacking to provide finger holds when loading arbors.
c.	Provide 25 percent of weight 2 inches (50.8 mm) thick and 75 percent of weight 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick for ease of balancing.
3.	FrontLoader 4 Inch Counterweight:
a.	Counterweights shall be 4 inches wide x 13 3/4 inches (349.25 mm) long, with handle cutout for ease of loading.  Counterweights shall be flame or laser cut steel.  Each piece shall be free from slag and sharp edges. The thickness of counterweights shall not vary more than 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) from nominal dimension.
b.	Provide 80 percent of weight 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) thick and 20 percent of weight 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick for ease of balancing.
4.	FrontLoader 6 Inch Counterweight: 
a.	Counterweights shall be 6 inches wide x 13 3/4 inches (349.25 mm) long, with handle cutout for ease of loading.  Counterweights shall be flame or laser cut steel.  Each piece shall be free from slag and sharp edges. The thickness of counterweights shall not vary more than 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) from nominal dimension.
b.	Provide 80 percent of weight 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) thick and 20 percent of weight 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick for ease of balancing.
5.	Counterweight: Not required.
CW.	Hand Line - Suregrip.
1.	Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) in diameter, employing a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
2.	The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
3.	The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that becomes visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
4.	The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
5.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
6.	Hand lines shall be SureGrip rope.
CX.	Hand Line - Multiline II.
1.	Hand line shall employ a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
2.	The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage.
3.	Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
4.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
5.	Hand lines shall be Multiline II rope.
CY.	Hand Line - Stage-Set-X.
1.	Hand lines shall have a parallel filament core constructed of high-tenacity filament polyester. The core shall remain firm and round under all load conditions, and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage. The core shall be wrapped in polyester tape to provide the core with protection against external damage and wear. The braided polyester outer jacket shall be constructed of spun polyester for good gripping.
2.	The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
3.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
4.	Hand lines shall be Stage-Set-X rope.
CZ.	Mobile Capstan Hoist.
1.	The capstan hoist shall have a capacity of 1500 lbs (680.4 KG) and an operating speed of approximately 35 fpm (0.17 mps). It shall consist of a structural steel, castered frame with a 4 inch (101.6 mm) tread diameter, cast iron capstan drum, directly coupled to the output of the gearbox.
2.	The motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings will be permitted between the motor and gear reducer.
3.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
4.	The gear reducer shall be a combination Helical/Worm reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
5.	The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release.
6.	The mobile dolly base shall be equipped with stationary casters in front and swivel casters in the rear. A 3 inch x 3 inch x 3/8 inch (76.2 mm x 76.2 mm x 9.52 mm) angle in front shall engage the reaction bar in the locking rail. A forged cleat permits cable tieoff and a hook provides storage for power and control cables. A side opening gate block shall protrude into the locking rail.
7.	The unit shall incorporate a full voltage reversing starter with overload, a footswitch to control motion, and an Up / Down direction selector. Unit will be equipped with 40 feet of type SO power cord with a locking electrical connector and mating receptacle.
8.	Mobile capstan hoist with 150 ft (45.7m) of 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) SureGrip rope with a latching hook spliced in one end.
DA.	Capstan Reaction Bar:
1.	Mobile Capstan Reaction Bar:
2.	The capstan hoist shall engage a bar welded to the front of the locking rail stanchion the full width of the joint on the top and bottom.
3.	The reaction bar shall be a 4 inch x 4 inch x 1/4 inch steel tube, in the vertical orientation, painted to match the locking rail.
DB.	Production Lighting Distribution:
1.	This assembly shall consist of an extruded aluminum wireway, 2-1/2 inch (63.5 mm) x 3-3/8 inch (85.7 mm) in cross section, and in lengths up to twenty feet. It shall contain a terminal strip for feed wire extending to outlets (flush mount or pigtail), as specified.
2.	Connector strip housing shall be fabricated of black extruded aluminum wireway with interlocking cover sections to exceed UL 1573 standards. Housing shall be inherently rustproof.
3.	Connector strip shall have an electrostatic paint finish in black, with outlets identified by 2 inch (50.8 mm) high die-cut circuit identification numbers on the vertical surface of the strip.
4.	The strip shall contain 125 degrees Celsius XLP wiring of the proper sizes and quantities to connect the individual outlets to the terminal blocks in up to sixteen 20 Amp circuits.
5.	The terminal blocks shall be molded barrier type with screw lugs suitable for connecting incoming wire. Terminal blocks can accept up to #10 gauge wire.
6.	Connector strips shall be supplied with 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) steel C-channel mounting brackets. Brackets shall be 60 inch (1.524 m) on centers. U-bolts shall be supplied to grip up to 2 inch (50.8 mm) O.D. standard steel pipe.
7.	The entire assembly shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
8.	Options available shall be color, LED indicator lights, low voltage raceway, custom circuit identification, and DMX input/output.
9.	Refer to lighting drawings for circuit quantities and locations.
2.29	POWERLIFT HOIST 
A.	Models:
1.	Model 018-P0225F:
a.	Speed: 20 Feet Per Minute.
b.	Total Capacity: 2,500 Pounds.
2.	Model 018-P0225V:
a.	Speed: 0-20 Feet Per Minute.
b.	Total Capacity: 2,500 Pounds.
3.	Model 018-P1212V:
a.	Speed: 0-120 Feet Per Minute.
b.	Total Capacity: 1,250 Pounds.
4.	Model 018-P1217V:
a.	Speed: 0-120 Feet Per Minute.
b.	Total Capacity: 1,750 Pounds.
5.	Model 018-P1225V:
a.	Speed: 0-120 Feet Per Minute.
b.	Total Capacity: 2,500 Pounds.
6.	Model 018-P1812V:
a.	Speed: 0-180 Feet Per Minute.
b.	Total Capacity: 1,200 Pounds.
7.	Model 018-P1817V:
a.	Speed: 0-180 Feet Per Minute.
b.	Total Capacity: 1,750 Pounds.
B.	Drum:
1.	The hoist shall use a moving single layer drum to minimize hoist size and wire rope wear. The drum shall move along its axis as it rotates, keeping the cable takeoff points on the drum aligned with the head block sheaves incorporated in the hoist (zero fleet angle design). This shall be accomplished by the drum sliding on its axle and the motor shall remain stationary.
2.	The drum shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps per cable. Drums that utilize multiple layers of cable shall not be allowed.
3.	The hoist drum diameter shall not change along its long axis.
4.	Cables shall be retained by a copper swage stop sleeve inside the drum. The cable retention system shall allow replacement of lift lines in situ. Cables shall be factory installed on the drum and color coded for ease of field installation.
5.	Preloaded chase rollers shall be provided to retain lift lines in their grooves.
6.	The pitch diameter of all drums shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer s minimum recommended D/d ratio. Load bearing wire rope groove profiles shall meet the recommendations of the "Wire Rope Technical Board".
7.	The drum shall be positively driven to move along its axle to maintain a zero-fleet angle with the grooves in the drum and the head block sheaves. The drum and axle shall be permanently lubricated.
C.	Gearmotor and Brakes:
1.	The motor, brakes, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit from a single manufacturer. For enhanced reliability, a continuous shaft shall link the brake, motor armature, and the first stage pinion gear without the use of couplings. Design of transmission components between the load and the brakes shall comply with ANSI E1.6-1 and EN 17206.
2.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) per NEMA MG1.
3.	The gear reducer shall employ helical gearing. The gear case shall be cast iron, aluminum is not allowed, for protection against shock damage and to provide noise reduction. The output shaft shall have triple lip oil seals to prevent leaks.
4.	The integral electro-magnetic brakes shall be spring applied and electrically released.
5.	Fixed speed hoists shall incorporate a cast iron flywheel fan for soft starts and stops.
6.	The brake controller shall apply the brake if the speed exceeds the commanded speed, the maximum speed.
D.	Headblock, Blocks and Sheaves:
1.	Hoist shall be constructed so that at least one wire rope life line can exit the machine at the rear of the hoist and the hoist can be located above the batten.
2.	Sheaves:
a.	All load bearing sheaves, both internal and external, shall have a minimum 26:1 D:d ratio to meet the wire rope manufacturer's recommendations. Sheave grooves shall be deeper than the cable diameter for cable protection. The sheave shall be equipped with a minimum 12 mm diameter machined steel shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Spacers shall positively retain the cable.
3.	Head Block:
a.	Head block sheaves shall be mounted between 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm) minimum side plates that fully enclose the sheaves. 
4.	Loft Blocks:
a.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.6 KG).
b.	External loft blocks shall be provided with idlers to support ongoing lift lines with an individual groove for each lift line to prevent tangling. The use of un-grooved idler drums is known to cause tangling and jams and is not allowed.
E.	Wire Rope and Cable Fittings:
1.	Wire Rope Lift Cables:
a.	All lift cables shall be 3/16 inch (4.77 mm) diameter 7 x 19 construction, galvanized utility cable, with a breaking strengths of 4,200 lbs. (1,905 KG).
b.	Damaged or deformed cable shall not be used. All wire rope rigging shall be installed so as to prevent abrasion of the wire rope against any part of the building construction or other equipment.
2.	Cable Fittings:
a.	Swaged sleeve fittings shall be copper Nicopress. Aluminum sleeves are not permitted. Swaged fittings shall be installed per the fitting manufacturer's instructions, using the appropriate tools, and checked with the appropriate Nicopress "Go - No go" gauge. Swage tool used and number of crimps required shall be recorded and provided to the user with user�s manual.
b.	Eyes shall be formed over galvanized steel, wire rope thimbles of correct size. It is grooved to support the rope or cable and prevent kinking and deformation.
3.	Inspection of Wire Rope:
a.	Wire rope terminations within hoist must be able to be inspected for excessive wear and damage per ANSI E1.47. Hoists that prevent the visual inspection of terminations shall not be permitted. 
F.	Limit Switches:
1.	Hoists shall have positively actuated limit switches for normal end of travel indication. These switches shall open the control circuit in the drive or starter to stop any further movement in the direction of travel.
2.	Positively actuated limit switches shall be provided for over travel indication. These shall use a separate circuit that is redundant to the normal end of travel switches, and positively disconnects power from the hoist.
3.	An override mechanism to allow resetting of the overtravel limits shall be included. 
4.	Limit switches shall be adjustable from the motor end of the hoist and set to match actual site conditions. 
5.	Computer controlled systems shall also have software limits utilizing solid state encoders, in addition to the two levels of mechanically actuated limit switches. 
G.	Emergency Stop: 
1.	The emergency stop system shall meet NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) and directly remove power either by means of electromechanical components, using a UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors or through the utilization of functional safety elements within the feature set of the VFD. 
2.	The emergency stop circuit shall be a normally closed circuit or a supervised circuit that provides the same or greater level of reliability and security. Its operation shall not depend on software or semiconductors. 
3.	Resetting the emergency stop circuit shall not initiate motion. 
4.	For hoists running at more than 25 fpm, a Category 1 controlled stop per NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) shall be provided. This provides a rapid ramp to a stop, and then removes power to reduce shock loading. 
H.	Load Sensing: 
1.	Load information shall be obtained from a load cell and located to sense the torque at the motor and the drum.  
2.	The load sensing system shall be able to accommodate changing loads, such as the weight of power and/or data control cables which change with elevation, without false tripping. 
3.	The load sensing system shall prevent the hoist from being operated while over the maximum capacity of the hoists. In the event of an overload while in travel the hoist shall be able to move down to resolve the overload.  
I.	Optional Continuous Beam: 
1.	The hoist shall integrate with an optional rectangle, tubular-shaped, aluminum extrusion capable mitigating horizontal loads on the building structure 
2.	Continuous beam shall provide mounting capabilities for loft blocks to be positioned anywhere along the beam. 
J.	Hoist Controller: 
1.	Hoist shall be compatible with all JR Clancy control systems. 
2.	Power and Control Wiring: 
a.	Integral power and control cables shall be provided with each hoist. Cables shall be eight feet long, with one end directly connected to the hoist assembly. 
b.	Power cables shall be a properly rated SO cable, with a NEMA L series locking connector. Control cables shall positive locking connectors. 
c.	Power and control raceways or boxes (configured as determined by the hoist manufacturer) shall be provided, complete with connectors that mate with those provided on the cables. 
3.	Maintenance Pendant: 
a.	Provide one maintenance pendant to be used during installation and delivered to owner at project completion. 
b.	Maintenance pendant shall consist of up and down operators that illuminate when the hoist is on an end of travel limits, an indicator light for when an overtravel limit has been struck and an operator to bypass the end of travel limit.  
c.	Pendant shall be compatible with all PowerLift hoists in the system. 
K.	Testing: 
1.	Hoist shall be tested to ensure proper operation of motor, limit switches and wiring prior to leaving the manufacturing facility. 
2.	After hoist has been installed on site, and in accordance with ANSI E1.6-1 hoist shall undergo a static, dynamic and emergency stop test at 100% of the rated load. In addition, each load securing device shall be tested independently at 100% of the rated load.
L.	General: 
1.	Systems that do not comply with ANSI E1.6-1 shall not be considered acceptable.
2.30	VARION HOIST
A.	Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
1.	Hoist Characteristics:
a.	Speed: 15 fpm (.076 mps) average over full travel range.
b.	Hoist Gross Capacity: 1,500 lbs. (680kg).
c.	Lifting Capacity: 1,000 lbs. (454kg) with full drum assuming 500 lbs. (227kg) of batten, cable management and production lighting distribution.
d.	Travel: up to 50 feet (15.24 m).
e.	# of Lift Lines: up to 5.
f.	Lift Line Diameter: 3/16 inch (4.76 mm).
2.	Construction:
a.	Hoist shall be mounted to a frame constructed of aluminum and steel, holding the elements of the hoist in proper alignment.
b.	Drum shall be directly connected to the output of the integrated motor-brake-gear reducer unit.
B.	Gearmotor:
1.	Motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer.
2.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3.	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
C.	Primary Brake:
1.	The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
2.	Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
3.	The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
D.	Shafts and Keys:
1.	Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B 106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting.".
2.	All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B 17.1, "Keys and Key Seats.".
E.	Pile-Up Drum:
1.	Drum shall have a slotted construction so that the cable winds on top of itself in multiple layers.
2.	The width of the slot shall be consistent throughout its depth to ensure the cable stacks evenly. The slot shall have sufficient depth for the entire travel, plus three dead wraps, and overtravel.
3.	The drum shall be direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gear box.
4.	Drum construction shall be steel of at least 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick. The drum sides shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand the forces applied by the cable.
5.	Cables shall enter the drum through holes drilled from the base of the slots at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a copper stop sleeve.
F.	Hoist Mounting Criteria:
1.	Hoist and Frame shall be mounted anywhere along the compression tube backbone.
2.	Center of hoist drum shall be placed within 3 feet-0 inch (0.91 m) of attachment to structure.
G.	Rotary Limit Switches:
1.	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
2.	Rotary limit switches shall be driven by roller chains. Sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded if a cover is needed per ANSI E1.6-1.
3.	Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
H.	Overspeed Brake:
1.	A secondary overspeed brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox.
2.	This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125 percent of the maximum rated hoist speed.
3.	The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
I.	Compression Tube:
1.	The hoist shall incorporate a rectangle, tubular-shaped, aluminum extrusion capable of supporting the entire static load of the hoist assembly plus the live load.
2.	The compression tube shall be attached to the structure at points no farther than 15 feet-0 inch (4.57 m) center to center.
3.	The compression tube shall negate the hoist transferring horizontal forces into the structure.
4.	Tube shall be providing mounting capabilities for loft blocks to be positioned anywhere along the tube.
J.	Overload Sensing:
1.	Overload sensing shall be included in the hoist as standard equipment.
2.	The sensor shall be a mechanical means of detecting an overload condition which sends an electrical signal to the motor controller.
3.	If an overload condition occurs, the sensor shall prevent the movement of the hoist until the load is returned to a proper weight.
K.	Blocks 
1.	3/16 inch grooved blocks shall be designed to be placed anywhere along the compression tube.
2.31	TITAN HOIST
A.	Models: 
1.	Model 018-T0224: 
a.	Speed: 20 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 2,400 Pounds. 
2.	Model 018-T0233: 
a.	Speed: 20 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 3,300 Pounds. 
3.	Model 018-T2022: 
a.	Speed: 0-200 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 2,200 Pounds. 
4.	Model 018-T2030: 
a.	Speed: 0-200 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 3,000 Pounds. 
5.	Model 018-T2633: 
a.	Speed: 0-260 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 3,300 Pounds. 
6.	Model 018-T3413: 
a.	Speed: 0-340 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 1,300 Pounds. 
7.	Model 018-T03417: 
a.	Speed: 0-340 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 1,750 Pounds. 
8.	Model 018-T4022: 
a.	Speed: 0-400 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 2,200 Pounds. 
9.	Model 018-T6514: 
a.	Speed: 0-650 Feet Per Minute. 
b.	Total Capacity: 1,400 Pounds. 
B.	The hoist shall be specifically designed for lifting loads in theatres and other places of public assembly. It shall have a compact design with all required components integrated into its structure. Hoists shall have integrated safety covers.
1.	The hoist shall incorporate a sturdy frame and adjustable mounting clips for easy mounting, either horizontally or vertically, on beams centered up to 12 feet-0 inch (3.6 m) apart. No external strengthening members shall be required.
2.	Characteristics: The hoist shall have the following characteristics:
a.	Speed and lifting capacity to specific applications with speeds up to 400 fpm (2 mps) and maximum capacity of 3300 lbs. (1497 kg).
b.	Travel:  Up to 8 lines at 90 feet (27.43 m) or up to 10 lines at 67 feet (20.42 m).
c.	Lift Lines:  1/4 inch (6.35 mm) diameter, 7x19 galvanized utility cable.
d.	Units shall be available for all standard 60 Hz and 50 Hz power sources without the need for transformers.
3.	The hoist shall use a moving drum to minimize hoist size and wire rope wear. The drum shall move along its axis as it rotates, keeping the cable takeoff points on the drum aligned with the head block sheaves incorporated in the hoist (zero fleet angle design).
4.	Hoists shall be designed such that multiple units can be mounted 16 inch (406.4 mm) on center, or 8 inch (203.2 mm) on center if hoists are alternated on stage left and right.
5.	Hoists shall not be used to lift humans.
C.	Gearmotor and Primary Brake:
1.	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit from a single manufacturer. For enhanced reliability, a continuous shaft shall link the brake, motor armature, and the first stage pinion gear without the use of couplings.
2.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) per NEMA MG1. Motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.0.
3.	The gear reducer shall employ helical gearing. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage and to provide noise reduction. The output shaft shall have triple lip oil seals to prevent leaks.
4.	The primary brake shall be spring applied and electrically released, with a minimum retarding torque of 150 percent of motor full load torque.
D.	For added security, a spring applied and electrically released electro-magnetic load brake shall be located between the output shaft of the gearbox and the drum. The brake controller shall apply the brake if the speed exceeds the commanded speed, the maximum speed, or if it detects a failure in the integrity of the shafting and gearbox.
1.	SureBrake II as manufactured by JR Clancy.
E.	Drum:
1.	The drum shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus a minimum of three dead wraps per cable.
2.	Cables shall be retained by a copper swage stop sleeve inside the drum. The cable retention system shall allow replacement of lift lines in situ.
3.	Preloaded chase rollers shall be provided to retain lift lines in their grooves.
4.	The pitch diameter of all drums shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio. Load bearing wire rope groove profiles shall meet the recommendations of the Wire Rope Technical Board.
5.	The drum shall be positively driven to move along its axle to maintain a zero fleet angle with the head block sheaves. The axle shall be permanently lubricated.
F.	Sheaves:
1.	All load bearing sheaves shall have a minimum 26:1 D:d ratio to meet the wire rope manufacturer's recommendations. Sheave grooves shall be deeper than the cable diameter for cable protection. The sheave shall be equipped with a machined steel shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Spacers shall positively retain the cable.
G.	Loft Blocks:
1.	Loft blocks shall have 12-gauge (2.7 8 mm) steel (minimum) side plates that shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles. Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.8 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation. There shall be a minimum of seven 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates, four of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
2.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340 kg), and shall be designed for upright or underhung use.
3.	Loft blocks shall be provided with idlers to support ongoing lift lines with an individual groove for each lift line to prevent tangling or abrasion.
H.	Limit Switches:
1.	Hoists shall have positively actuated limit switches for normal end of travel indication. These switches shall open the control circuit in the drive or starter to stop any further movement in the direction of travel.
2.	Positively actuated limit switches shall be provided for over travel indication. These shall use a separate circuit that is redundant to the normal end of travel switches, and positively disconnects power from the hoist, using a UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactor.
3.	An override mechanism to allow resetting of the over travel limits shall be included in the drive cabinet.
4.	Limit switches shall be set to match actual site conditions.
5.	Computer controlled systems shall also have software limits utilizing solid state encoders, in addition to the two levels of mechanically actuated limit switches.
I.	Motor Controllers:
1.	For fire and electrical safety, motor controllers shall conform to the NEC (NFPA 70), be built in accordance with UL Standard UL 508E, and be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2.	Controllers shall provide over current, overload, and phase loss protection.
3.	Operation of the system key switch shall disconnect power to all starters and drives.
4.	A maintenance pendant shall be provided for direct control of the hoists during setup and for maintenance. It shall contain Up and Down pushbuttons, an Overtravel Bypass switch, and a key operated On / Off switch.
J.	Emergency Stop System.
1.	The emergency stop system shall meet SIL 3 or NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) and directly remove power by means of electromechanical components, using a UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
2.	The emergency stop circuit shall be a normally closed circuit or a supervised circuit that provides the same or greater level of reliability and security. Its operation shall not depend on software or semiconductors.
3.	Resetting the emergency stop circuit shall not initiate motion.
4.	For hoists running at more than 50 fpm (0.254 mps), a Category 1 controlled stop per NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) shall be provided. This provides a rapid ramp to a stop, and then removes power to reduce shock loading.
K.	Load Monitoring:
1.	Load information shall be obtained from dual solid state load cells on the hoist. The load monitoring system shall be able to accommodate dynamic loads, such as cable weight that changes during batten travel, without false tripping.
2.	Load monitoring requires the use of a SceneControl series control console.
L.	Installation supervision and commissioning of the motorized rigging system shall be performed by a factory authorized and trained technician.
2.32	POWERASSIST HOIST
A.	The single axis hoist shall be used to motorize counterweight rigging sets.
1.	The hoist shall be of a compact design with all required components integrated into its structure. It shall be floor mounted in place of a floor block and rope lock. Its starter and control mount to the locking rail.
2.	The hoist assembly shall be less than 12 inch (305 mm) wide, and be able to automate a set that is located between counterweight sets on 6 inch (152.4 mm) centers or greater.
3.	Single axis hoists shall have a speed of 25 fpm (0.13 mps) with a total line set capacity of 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). The hoist shall handle an out of balance load equal to 50 percent of the set capacity. The counterweight arbor shall be permanently loaded to 50 percent of the set capacity. The counterweight in the arbor shall be banded in place, and a method to impede the installation of additional counterweight provided. A sign shall be provided warning the user not to adjust the weight in the arbor.
4.	All components shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
5.	Motor, Gearbox and Brake:
a.	A motor, gear reducer and primary brake shall be provided. Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) per NEMA MG1.
b.	The gearmotor shall have a minimum service factor of 1.0 and be provided with seals to effectively prevent leaks.
c.	Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque of 200 percent of motor full load torque. The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
6.	Drive Medium:
a.	The drive medium shall allow the use of a counterweight set head block without modification and shall be positively driven in a manner that shall allow repeatable positioning.
b.	The drive medium shall have a minimum design factor of 10:1.
c.	Roller chains shall have a double leaf construction. UHMW chain guides shall be provided to ensure positive engagement of chain and sprockets, even with slack in the drive chain.
d.	The portion of the drive medium that runs on the head block shall operate at the same pitch diameter as the lift lines so that they operate at the same speed, to avoid excessive cable wear and "jumping" caused by differing speeds.
7.	Limit Switches:
a.	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.	Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
8.	Fixed Speed Motor Controllers:
a.	For fire and electrical safety, motor controllers shall conform to the NEC (NFPA 70), be built in accordance with UL 508E, and be "touch safe" per IEC 60204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
b.	Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overload limit switch shall open the line contactor and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
c.	The controller shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower. Overload and overcurrent protection shall conform to UL and NEC requirements.
9.	Control Station:
a.	Control stations shall be contained in the hoist assembly, and contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons for each hoist. A key operated On / Off switch shall be provided.
b.	A red, mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, which shall disconnect power to the winch through a circuit meeting NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) requirements.
c.	A "Service" indicator shall be provided to alert the user when regular system service is required.
d.	Panel components (pushbuttons, key switches, switches, indicators, E-stop switches, and the like) shall be industrial grade units.
2.33	POWERLINE HOIST
A.	The line shaft type hoist shall have the ability to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed. All components shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
1.	The hoist shaft shall incorporate a sturdy frame and field adjustable mounting clips for easy mounting.
a.	Lift Line Diameter: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) 8 inch drums (2.3 mm)5 mm.
b.	Lift Line Diameter: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 6 inch drums8 mm (152 mm drums).
2.	Construction:
a.	The integrated motor - brake - gear reducer unit and associated components, drum, shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the hoist in proper alignment.
b.	A 4 inch x 4 inch (102 mm x102 mm) rectangular steel backbone shall be provided to support the PowerLine hoist. Backbones shall be continuous, or non-continuous, to meet the specific requirements of the specific application. The backbone shall accommodate spans between mounting steel members up to 12 feet (3.65 m) with a maximum deflection of L/180.
c.	Gearmotors shall be able to mount parallel or perpendicular to the plane of the mounting steel.
d.	Lift lines shall be able to exit parallel or perpendicular to the plane of the mounting steel.
3.	Gearmotor:
a.	Motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No coupling shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer.
b.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
c.	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm or helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The input and output shafts shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4.	Primary Brake:
a.	The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
b.	Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release as backup. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
c.	The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
5.	Shafts, Keys, and Couplings:
a.	Drums shall be interconnected by commercial transmission shafts with universal joints at each end. The use of solid couplings and bar, pipe, or square tubes as shafts are not permitted.
b.	Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting".
c.	All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B17.1, "Keys and Key Seats".
d.	Universal joints shall accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads, and shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections.
6.	Bearings:
a.	Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds with a minimum L10 life of 2,000 hours.
7.	Helical Drums:
a.	Winding drums shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
b.	Drums shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps. The drum diameter shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio.
c.	Drum construction shall be of the all welded type, including a continuous drum shaft. Cables shall enter the drum through key slots machined from root of the cable groove through the tubing wall at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve inserted through the end of the slot from the outside. Cables shall have a minimum of three dead wraps on the drum. In order to prevent unbalanced operation, drum assemblies that exceed 20 rpm shall be straightened to a maximum total indicated run out (T.I.R.) of 0.005 inch (0.127 mm).
d.	Each end of the drum shall be supported by either the output shaft of the gearbox or an appropriately sized bearing mounted in the side steel plate that fully captures the drum shaft.
e.	Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
f.	Side plates shall hold four keepers designed to prevent cross winding of the lift lines on the drums.
g.	Tread pressures shall not exceed allowable radial bearing pressures as specified in the Wire Rope User Manual.
h.	Drums shall have capacity for termination on either end so lift lines can come off in either direction.
8.	Limit Switches:
a.	The hoist shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.	Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
B.	Secondary Brake:
1.	Electric Brake:
a.	A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.	This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power to release the brake.
c.	Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
2.	Overspeed Brake:
a.	A secondary overspeed load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum.
b.	This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125 percent of the maximum rated hoist speed (50 rpm minimum). The friction lining is mechanically set against the drum to grip when the arms extend to lock into the drum and bring the hoist to a halt.
c.	The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
C.	Fixed Speed Starters:
1.	Each fixed speed hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E compliant, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 60204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2.	The NEMA/IEC mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3.	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4.	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
D.	Variable Speed Drive:
1.	Motor controllers shall be solid state flux vector controllers, designed for hoisting duty, and rated for the motor to be controlled. The controller shall incorporate closed loop feedback using a solid state position encoder mounted on the motor shaft to identify the speed and position of motor shaft in order to provide the greatest accuracy and performance. Each controller shall incorporate a microprocessor to provide direct control of torque and shaft position. The controller shall provide an essentially infinite speed range, including the ability to produce full torque at zero speed.
2.	The motor controller enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with a hinged, latching cover. The interior of the cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 60204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
3.	A brake contactor shall be provided. The controller shall not release the hoist brake until the drive has developed the full rated torque.
4.	Controllers shall provide controlled deceleration and braking of rapidly descending loads.
5.	Each controller shall contain a line contactor. This contactor shall be controlled by the E-stop and overtravel limit switches, providing a redundant means of removing power from the hoist.
6.	Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
7.	Each controller shall incorporate overcurrent protection in the form of properly rated fuses (per UL 198C guidelines) or circuit breakers.
8.	Controllers shall incorporate all required contactors, relays, and interface electronics required by the control system. Controllers shall provide under voltage, over voltage, instantaneous over current, overload, and over temperature indication. Properly labeled, screw clamp terminals shall be provided for all field connections, including limit switches and other peripheral devices.
E.	Load Monitoring:
1.	Load information shall be obtained from solid state load cells mounted between the base of the hoist and the gear motor.
a.	The cell shall accommodate total hoist loads or changing loads depending on the functions included in the supplied controls.
F.	Cable Roller:
1.	Fixed Cable Roller.
a.	Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.	The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
2.	Sprung Cable Roller:
a.	Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.	The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
c.	The shaft is spring mounted so crossed cables or jams shall cause a cable to jump from its groove and trip a limit switch, stopping the hoist.
G.	Slack Line Detection:
1.	Charged Bar.
2.	Provide an electrically isolated bar that grounds the control when a cable escapes from its groove. When a line touches and grounds the bar it activates a contact in the controller that does one of the following as wired or programmed:
a.	Engages the emergency stop and halts all motion.
b.	Stops motion and prevent further motion in the same direction.
c.	Signals the PLC and waits for further instruction.
2.34	SELF-CLIMBING HOIST 
A.	The self-climbing truss type hoist shall have the ability to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed. All components shall be designed to properly support the required loads. 
1.	The truss shall be up to 50 ft long, with an integral lifting hoist. 
2.	The system shall be built inside of 12 inch x 18 inch plated truss. 
3.	Hoist will have two, three, or four lift lines depending on capacity, lift line spacing and truss length. 
a.	Contact manufacturer for specific requirements. 
4.	Standard hoist drums shall have 35 feet of available travel. 
B.	Gear Case: 
1.	The gear assembly shall be a helical unit as manufactured by SEW Eurodrive. It shall be equipped with an integral brake-motor which is flange mounted to the unit. The first stage pinion gear shall be mounted directly to the motor rotor shaft. 
2.	The gearcase shall be constructed of cast iron for durability. The output shaft must have a double lip oil seal to prevent leakage. The gearing must have at least a 1.0 minimum service factor and a 1.25 mechanical strength factor. 
3.	The motor shall be totally enclosed and fan cooled (TEFC). The motor must attain at least an NEMA service factor of 1.0. 
4.	The four-pole motor shall operate at 208 volts, 3 phase. 
C.	Gearmotor: 
1.	Motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No coupling shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer. 
2.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation. 
3.	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm or helical/bevel reducer.  The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage.  The input and output shafts shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
D.	Primary Brake: 
1.	The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake. 
2.	Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release as backup. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque. 
3.	The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure. 
E.	Shafts, Keys, and Couplings: 
1.	Drums shall be interconnected by commercial transmission shafts with universal joints at each end. The use of solid couplings and bar, pipe, or square tubes as shafts are not permitted. 
2.	Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting". 
3.	All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B17.1, "Keys and Key Seats". 
4.	Universal joints shall accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads, and shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections. 
F.	Bearings: 
1.	Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds with a minimum L10 life of 2,000 hours. 
G.	Helical Drums:
1.	Winding drums shall be designed to properly support the required loads. 
2.	Drums shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps. The drum diameter shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio. 
3.	Drum construction shall be of the all welded type, including a continuous drum shaft.  Cables shall enter the drum through key slots machined from root of the cable groove through the tubing wall at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve inserted through the end of the slot from the outside. Cables shall have a minimum of three dead wraps on the drum. In order to prevent unbalanced operation, drum assemblies that exceed 20 rpm shall be straightened to a maximum total indicated run out (T.I.R.) of 0.005 inch (0.127 mm). 
4.	Each end of the drum shall be supported by either the output shaft of the gearbox or an appropriately sized bearing mounted in the side steel plate that fully captures the drum shaft. 
5.	Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes. 
6.	Side plates shall hold four keepers designed to prevent cross winding of the lift lines on the drums. 
7.	Tread pressures shall not exceed allowable radial bearing pressures as specified in the Wire Rope User Manual. 
8.	Drums shall have capacity for termination on either end so lift lines can come off in either direction. 
H.	Limit Switches:
1.	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets.  Switches shall have snap acting contacts. 
2.	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains.  If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded. 
3.	Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings. 
I.	Overspeed Brake: 
1.	Two secondary overspeed load brakes shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor.  The brakes shall be located on each end of the hoist. 
2.	This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125 percent of the maximum rated hoist speed (50 rpm minimum). The friction lining is mechanically set against the drum to grip when the arms extend to lock into the drum and bring the hoist to a halt. 
3.	The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation. 
J.	Pantograph Cable Management: 
1.	Pantograph shall accommodate up to (64) 12 Ga conductors and up to (2) data cables. 
a.	Up to (8) 8 conductor flat cables. Maximum capacity of (25) 120 Volt, 20 amp circuits utilizing (1) 12 Ga ground conductor for every (2) 20 amp circuits. 
b.	Data Cable: 
1)	Data cable shall be DMX. 
2)	Data cable shall be CAT5. 
2.	Pantograph shall be constructed with a physical barrier between the power supply and data cables within the channel. 
3.	The pantograph shall consist of a series powder coated aluminum channels hinged to each other to allow the entire distance of travel required by the batten, up to a 52 feet (15.8 m) fully extended length. 
4.	The top arm shall be connected to a moving trolley. 
5.	Pantograph fully retracted height shall be no greater than 25 inch (635 mm) vertical. 
6.	Pantograph shall mount to a 1.5 inch (38 mm) schedule 40 pipe batten. 
7.	Pantograph shall travel at a maximum speed of 30 feet per minute (9 meters per second). 
8.	System includes power and data strain reliefs for top and bottom. 
9.	System shall include grid junction box to be installed by electrical contractor. 
2.35	PERFORMER HOIST 
A.	General: 
1.	The hoist shall be specifically designed for lifting loads in theatres and other places of public assembly. It shall have a compact design with all required components integrated into its structure. 
2.	The hoist shall incorporate a sturdy frame and adjustable mounting clips for easy mounting.
3.	Characteristics: The hoist shall have the following characteristics: 
a.	Speed and lifting capacity shall be up to 480 FPM (2.4mps) and 400lbs (180kg), or up to 590 FPM (3mps) and 220 LBS (100kg) 
b.	Travel: Up to 100 feet (30 m) 
c.	Lift Lines: 1 at 1/4 inch (6.4mm) diameter or 5mm, 7x19 galvanized utility cable 
d.	Units shall be available for all standard 60 Hz and 50 Hz power sources without the need for transformers. 
4.	The hoist shall use a moving drum to minimize hoist size and wire rope wear. The drum shall move along its axis as it rotates, keeping the cable takeoff points on the drum aligned with the head block sheaves incorporated in the hoist (zero fleet angle design). 
B.	Gearmotor and Primary Brake: 
1.	The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit from a single manufacturer. For enhanced reliability, a continuous shaft shall link the brake, motor armature, and the first stage pinion gear without the use of couplings. 
2.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) per NEMA MG1. Motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.0. 
3.	The gear reducer shall employ helical gearing. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage and to provide noise reduction. The output shaft shall have triple lip oil seals to prevent leaks. 
4.	The primary brake shall be spring applied and electrically released, with a minimum retarding torque of 150 percent of motor full load torque. 
C.	SureBrake II: For added security, a spring applied and electrically released electro-magnetic load brake shall be located between the output shaft of the gearbox and the drum. The brake controller shall apply the brake if the speed exceeds the commanded speed, the maximum speed, or if it detects a failure in the integrity of the shafting and gearbox. 
D.	Drum: 
1.	The drum shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus a minimum of three dead wraps per cable. 
2.	Cables shall be retained by metal clip and screw tapped into drum. 
3.	Preloaded chase rollers shall be provided to retain lift lines in their grooves. 
4.	The pitch diameter of all drums shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio. Load bearing wire rope groove profiles shall meet the recommendations of the Wire Rope Technical Board. 
5.	The drum shall be positively driven to move along its axle to maintain a zero fleet angle with the head block sheaves. The axle shall be permanently lubricated. 
E.	Sheaves:
1.	All load bearing sheaves shall have a minimum 26:1 D:d ratio to meet the wire rope manufacturer's recommendations. Sheave grooves shall be deeper than the cable diameter for cable protection. The sheave shall be equipped with a machined steel shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Spacers shall positively retain the cable. 
F.	Loft Blocks:
1.	Loft blocks shall have 12-gauge (2.78mm) steel (minimum) side plates that shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles. Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" (38.1mm x 38.1mm x 4.8mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation. There shall be a minimum of seven 1/4" (6.4mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates, four of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves. 
2.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8kg), and shall be designed for upright or underhung use. 
3.	Loft blocks shall be provided with idlers to support ongoing lift lines with an individual groove for each lift line to prevent tangling or abrasion. 
G.	Limit Switches:
1.	Hoists shall have positively actuated limit switches for normal end of travel indication. These switches shall open the control circuit in the drive or starter to stop any further movement in the direction of travel. 
2.	Positively actuated limit switches shall be provided for over travel indication. These shall use a separate circuit that is redundant to the normal end of travel switches, and positively disconnects power from the hoist, using a UL580E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactor. 
3.	An override mechanism to allow resetting of the over travel limits shall be included in the drive cabinet. 
4.	Limit switches shall be set to match actual site conditions. 
5.	Computer controlled systems shall also have software limits utilizing solid state encoders, in addition to the two levels of mechanically actuated limit switches. 
H.	Motor Controllers:
1.	For fire and electrical safety, motor controllers shall conform to the NEC (NFPA 70), be built in accordance with UL Standard 508, and be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules. 
2.	Variable speed controllers 
a.	Variable speed controllers shall be solid state flux vector drives designed for hoisting duty. Each controller shall incorporate closed loop feedback using a solid state position encoder mounted on the motor shaft to provide the greatest accuracy and performance. The controller shall provide an essentially infinite speed range, including the ability to produce full torque at zero speed. The use of open loop drives is prohibited. 
b.	Power wiring between vector drives and motors shall be shielded to reduce electrical noise. 
c.	Dynamic braking resistors are provided to dissipate heat during stopping. 
3.	Controllers shall provide over current, overload, and phase loss protection. 
4.	Operation of the system key switch shall disconnect power to all starters and drives. 
5.	A maintenance pendant shall be provided for direct control of the hoists during setup and for maintenance. It shall contain Up and Down pushbuttons, an Overtravel Bypass switch, and a key operated On / Off switch. 
I.	Emergency Stop System:
1.	The emergency stop system shall meet SIL 3 or NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) and directly remove power by means of electromechanical components, using a UL580E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors 
2.	The emergency stop circuit shall be a normally closed circuit or a supervised circuit that provides the same or greater level of reliability and security. Its operation shall not depend on software or semiconductors. 
3.	Resetting the emergency stop circuit shall not initiate motion. 
4.	For hoists running at more than 50 fpm (0.254mps), a Category 1 controlled stop per NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) shall be provided. This provides a rapid ramp to a stop, and then removes power to reduce shock loading. 
J.	Load Monitoring:
1.	Load information shall be obtained from dual solid state load cells on the hoist. The load monitoring system shall be able to accommodate dynamic loads, such as cable weight that changes during batten travel, without false tripping. 
2.	Load monitoring requires the use of a SceneControl series control console. 
K.	Installation supervision and commissioning of the motorized rigging system shall be performed by a factory authorized and trained technician. 
2.36	CUSTOM LINE SHAFT HOIST
A.	General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
1.	The hoist shaft shall incorporate a sturdy frame and field adjustable mounting clips for easy mounting.
a.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
b.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
c.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 5/16 inch (7.9 mm).
d.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
2.	Construction:
a.	The integrated motor - brake - gear reducer unit and associated components, which may include a helical drum, shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the winch in proper alignment.
b.	Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
c.	Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from moving left and right as cables wrap on the drum.
d.	Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end.
e.	Side plates shall have three keepers designed to prevent cross winding of lift lines on the drums.
3.	Gearmotor:
a.	Motors, primary brakes, and gearboxes shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer. Exceptions shall be permitted only when special gearing or torque requirements cannot be met with an integrated unit.
b.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
c.	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm or helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4.	Primary Brake:
a.	The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
b.	Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
c.	The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
5.	Shafts, Keys, and Couplings:
a.	Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B 106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting",.
b.	All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B 17.1, "Keys and Key Seats.".
c.	Couplings shall be chosen to accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads. Couplings shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections.
d.	In the case of line shaft hoists, the couplings in the shafts between the drums shall be universal joints in order to compensate for misalignment and deflections.
e.	Only couplings made of steel and with steel to steel contact surfaces shall be used.
6.	Bearings:
a.	Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds.
b.	The use of self-aligning flange bearings is preferred. The use of other bearing types shall be in accordance with good engineering practice. Pillow blocks may be used only where they are subject to compressive forces only.
7.	Helical Drums:
a.	Winding drums shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
b.	Drums shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps. The drum diameter shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio.
c.	Drum construction shall be of the all welded type. Cables shall enter the drum through holes drilled from root of the cable groove through the tubing wall at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve. In order to prevent unbalanced operation, drum assemblies that exceed 20 rpm shall be straightened to a maximum total indicated run out (T.I.R.) of 0.005 inch (0.127 mm).
d.	Each end of the drum shall be supported by either the output shaft of the gearbox or an appropriately properly sized self-aligning flange mounted in a steel plate that fully captures the drum shaft.
8.	Fixed Speed Starters:
a.	Each fixed speed hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
b.	The NEMA/IEC mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
c.	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
d.	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
e.	Touch safe protection, a line contactor, and override spring return switch for overtravel limits are mandatory for safety.
9.	Variable Speed Drive:
a.	Motor controllers shall be solid state flux vector controllers, designed for hoisting duty, and rated for the motor to be controlled. The controller shall incorporate closed loop feedback using a solid state position encoder mounted on the motor shaft to identify the speed and position of motor shaft in order to provide the greatest accuracy and performance. Each controller shall incorporate a microprocessor to provide direct control of torque and shaft position. The controller shall provide an essentially infinite speed range, including the ability to produce full torque at zero speed.
b.	The motor controller enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with a hinged, latching cover. The interior of the cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
c.	A brake contactor shall be provided. The controller shall not release the hoist brake until the drive has developed the full rated torque.
d.	Controllers shall provide controlled deceleration and braking of rapidly descending loads. Dynamic braking resistor shall be provided to dissipate heat during stopping.
e.	Each controller shall contain a line contactor. This contactor shall be controlled by the E-stop and overtravel limit switches, providing a redundant means of removing power from the winch.
f.	Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
g.	Each controller shall incorporate overcurrent protection in the form of properly rated fuses (per UL 198C guidelines) or circuit breakers.
h.	Controllers shall incorporate all required contactors, relays, and interface electronics required by the control system. Controllers shall provide under voltage, over voltage, instantaneous over current, overload, and over temperature indication. Properly labeled, screw clamp terminals shall be provided for all field connections, including limit switches and other peripheral devices. .
i.	Touch safe protection, a line contactor, and override spring return switch for overtravel limits are mandatory for safety.
B.	Limit Switch:
1.	Rotary Limit Switches.
a.	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.	Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
2.	Direct Struck Limit Switch:
a.	Direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units.
b.	Switches shall have positive opening contacts.
c.	Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or Allen Bradley Bulletin 802T. 
C.	Secondary Brake:
1.	Electric Brake:
a.	A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.	This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power to release the brake.
c.	Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
2.	Overspeed Brake:
a.	A secondary overspeed load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum.
b.	This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125 percent of the maximum rated hoist speed (50 rpm minimum). The friction lining is mechanically set against the drum to grip when the arms extend to lock into the drum and bring the hoist to a halt.
c.	The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
3.	Caliper Load Brake:
a.	A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. The brake flange shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake caliper(s) shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.	This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power (air or electric) to release the brake.
c.	Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
D.	Load Monitoring:
1.	Load information shall be obtained from solid state load cells mounted between the base of the hoist and the gear motor.
a.	The cell shall accommodate total hoist loads or changing loads depending on the functions included in the supplied controls.
E.	Cable Roller:
1.	Fixed Cable Roller:
a.	Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.	The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
2.	Sprung Cable Roller:
a.	Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.	The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
c.	The shaft is spring mounted so crossed cables or jams shall cause a cable to jump from its groove and trip a limit switch, stopping the hoist.
F.	Slack Line Detection:
1.	Charged Bar:
2.	Provide an electrically isolated bar that grounds the control when a cable escapes from its groove. When a line touches and grounds the bar it activates a contact in the controller that does one of the following as wired or programmed:
a.	Engages the emergency stop and halts all motion.
b.	Stops motion and prevent further motion in the same direction.
c.	Signals the PLC and waits for further instruction.
2.37	DRUM HOIST
A.	Drum Hoist:
1.	General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
a.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
b.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
c.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 5/16 inch (7.9 mm).
d.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
2.	Construction:
a.	All hoists shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the hoist in proper alignment.
b.	A helical drum shall be directly connected to the output of the integrated motor - brake - gear reducer unit. The outboard end of the drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
3.	Gearmotor:
a.	Motors, primary brakes, and gearboxes shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer.
b.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
c.	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm or helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4.	Primary Brake:
a.	The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
b.	Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
c.	The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
5.	Shafts, Keys, and Couplings:
a.	Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B 106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting",.
b.	All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B 17.1, "Keys and Key Seats.".
c.	Couplings shall be chosen to accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads. Couplings shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections.
d.	Only couplings made of steel and with steel to steel contact surfaces shall be used. Solid couplings shall not be permitted.
6.	Bearings:
a.	Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds.
b.	The use of self-aligning flange bearings is preferred. The use of other bearing types shall be in accordance with good engineering practice. Pillow blocks may be used only where they are subject to compressive forces only.
7.	Helical Drums:
a.	Winding drums shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
b.	Drums shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps. The drum diameter shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio.
c.	Drum construction shall be of the all welded type. Cables shall enter the drum through key slots machined from root of the cable groove through the tubing wall at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve inserted through the end of the slot from the outside. Cables shall have a minimum of three dead wraps on the drum. In order to prevent unbalanced operation, drum assemblies that exceed 20 rpm shall be straightened to a maximum total indicated run out (T.I.R.) of 0.005 inch (0.127 mm).
d.	Each end of the drum shall be supported by either the output shaft of the gearbox or an appropriately sized, self-aligning flange bearing.
8.	Fixed Speed Starters:
a.	Each fixed speed hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E compliant, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
b.	The NEMA/IEC mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL50808E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
c.	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
d.	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.	Variable Speed Drive:
a.	Motor controllers shall be solid state flux vector controllers, designed for hoisting duty, and rated for the motor to be controlled. The controller shall incorporate closed loop feedback using a solid state position encoder mounted on the motor shaft to identify the speed and position of motor shaft in order to provide the greatest accuracy and performance. Each controller shall incorporate a microprocessor to provide direct control of torque and shaft position. The controller shall provide an essentially infinite speed range, including the ability to produce full torque at zero speed.
b.	The motor controller enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with a hinged, latching cover. The interior of the cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
c.	A brake contactor shall be provided. The controller shall not release the hoist brake until the drive has developed the full rated torque.
d.	Controllers shall provide controlled deceleration and braking of rapidly descending loads.
e.	Each controller shall contain a line contactor. This contactor shall be controlled by the E-stop and overtravel limit switches, providing a redundant means of removing power from the winch.
f.	Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
g.	Each controller shall incorporate overcurrent protection in the form of properly rated fuses (per UL 198C guidelines) or circuit breakers.
h.	Controllers shall incorporate all required contactors, relays, and interface electronics required by the control system. Controllers shall provide under voltage, over voltage, instantaneous over current, overload, and over temperature indication. Properly labeled, screw clamp terminals shall be provided for all field connections, including limit switches and other peripheral devices.
10.	Hoists shall be UL or ETL marked as meeting "UL 1340 Standard for Hoists".
B.	Limit Switch:
1.	Rotary Limit Switches:
a.	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.	Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
2.	Direct Struck Limit Switch:
a.	Direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units.
b.	Switches shall have positive opening contacts.
c.	Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or Allen Bradley Bulletin 802T.
C.	Secondary Brake:
1.	Electric Brake:
a.	A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.	This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power to release the brake.
c.	Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
2.	Overspeed Brake:
a.	A secondary overspeed load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum.
b.	This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125 percent of the maximum rated hoist speed (50 rpm minimum). The friction lining is mechanically set against the drum to grip when the arms extend to lock into the drum and bring the hoist to a halt.
c.	The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
3.	Caliper Load Brake:
a.	A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. The brake flange shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake caliper(s) shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.	This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power (air or electric) to release the brake.
c.	Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
D.	Load Monitoring:
1.	Load Monitor:
a.	Load information shall be obtained from solid state load cells mounted between the base of the hoist and the gear motor.
b.	The cell shall accommodate total hoist loads or changing loads depending on the functions included in the supplied controls.
E.	Cable Roller:
1.	Fixed Cable Roller:
a.	Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.	The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
2.	Sprung Cable Roller:
a.	Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.	The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
c.	The shaft is spring mounted so crossed cables or jams shall cause a cable to jump from its groove and trip a limit switch, stopping the hoist.
F.	Slack Line Detection:
1.	Charged bar.
2.	Provide an electrically isolated bar that grounds the control when a cable escapes from its groove. When a line touches and grounds the bar it activates a contact in the controller that does one of the following as wired or programmed:
a.	Engages the emergency stop and halts all motion.
b.	Stops motion and prevent further motion in the same direction.
c.	Signals the PLC and waits for further instruction.
2.38	PILE-UP DRUM HOIST
A.	General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
1.	General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
a.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
b.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
c.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 5/16 inch (7.9 mm).
d.	Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
2.	Construction:
a.	All hoists shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the hoist in proper alignment.
b.	A drum shall be directly connected to the output of the integrated motor - brake - gear reducer unit. The outboard end of the drum shall be supported by a self aligning flange bearing.
3.	Gearmotor:
a.	Motors, primary brakes, and gearboxes shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer. Exceptions shall be permitted only when special gearing or torque requirements cannot be met with an integrated unit.
b.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
c.	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4.	Primary Brake:
a.	The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
b.	Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque.
c.	The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
5.	Shafts, Keys, and Couplings:
a.	Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B 106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting",.
b.	All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B 17.1, "Keys and Key Seats.".
c.	Couplings shall be chosen to accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads. Couplings shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections.
d.	Only couplings made of steel and with steel to steel contact surfaces shall be used. Solid couplings shall not be permitted.
6.	Bearings:
a.	Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds.
b.	The use of self-aligning flange bearings is preferred. The use of other bearing types shall be in accordance with good engineering practice. Pillow blocks may be used only where they are subject to compressive forces only.
7.	Pile Up Drum (Yo-Yo Drum):
a.	Drum shall have a slotted construction so that the cable winds on top of itself in a single layer.
b.	The width of the slot shall be consistent throughout its depth to ensure the cable stacks evenly. The slot shall have sufficient depth for the entire travel, plus three dead wraps, and overtravel.
c.	The drum shall be direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gear box.
d.	A self-aligning flange bearing shall support the outboard end of the shaft.
e.	Drum construction shall be of steel or ASTM A-48 Class 30 grey iron castings. The drum sides shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand the forces applied by the cable.
f.	Cables shall enter the drum through holes drilled from the base of the slots at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve.
8.	Fixed Speed Starters:
a.	Each fixed speed hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E compliant, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
b.	The NEMA/IEC mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
c.	Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
d.	Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.	Variable Speed Drive:
a.	Motor controllers shall be solid state flux vector controllers, designed for hoisting duty, and rated for the motor to be controlled. The controller shall incorporate closed loop feedback using a solid state position encoder mounted on the motor shaft to identify the speed and position of motor shaft in order to provide the greatest accuracy and performance. Each controller shall incorporate a microprocessor to provide direct control of torque and shaft position. The controller shall provide an essentially infinite speed range, including the ability to produce full torque at zero speed.
b.	The motor controller enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with a hinged, latching cover. The interior of the cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
c.	A brake contactor shall be provided. The controller shall not release the hoist brake until the drive has developed the full rated torque.
d.	Controllers shall provide controlled deceleration and braking of rapidly descending loads.
e.	Each controller shall contain a line contactor. This contactor shall be controlled by the E-stop and overtravel limit switches, providing a redundant means of removing power from the winch.
f.	Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
g.	Each controller shall incorporate overcurrent protection in the form of properly rated fuses (per UL 198C guidelines) or circuit breakers.
h.	Controllers shall incorporate all required contactors, relays, and interface electronics required by the control system. Controllers shall provide under voltage, over voltage, instantaneous over current, overload, and over temperature indication. Properly labeled, screw clamp terminals shall be provided for all field connections, including limit switches and other peripheral devices.
B.	Limit Switch:
1.	Rotary Limit Switches:
a.	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.	Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.	Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
2.	Direct Struck Limit Switch:
a.	Direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units.
b.	Switches shall have positive opening contacts.
c.	Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or Allen Bradley Bulletin 802T.
C.	Secondary Brake:
1.	Electric Brake:
a.	A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.	This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power to release the brake.
c.	Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
2.	Overspeed Brake:
a.	A secondary overspeed load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum.
b.	This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125 percent of the maximum rated hoist speed (50 rpm minimum). The friction lining is mechanically set against the drum to grip when the arms extend to lock into the drum and bring the hoist to a halt.
c.	The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
3.	Caliper Load Brake:
a.	A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. The brake flange shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake caliper(s) shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.	This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power (air or electric) to release the brake.
c.	Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
D.	Load Monitoring:
1.	Load Monitor:
a.	Load information shall be obtained from solid state load cells mounted between the base of the hoist and the gear motor.
b.	The cell shall accommodate total hoist loads or changing loads depending on the functions included in the supplied controls.
2.39	SUMMIT HOIST 
A.	Models: 
1.	Summit Theatron 018-S0322 
a.	Total Capacity: 2,200 Pounds. 
b.	Speed: 30 Feet Per Minute. 
c.	Travel: 55�-0�. 
2.	Summit Theatron 018-S2115 
a.	Total Capacity: 1,500 Pounds. 
b.	Speed: 205 Feet Per Minute. 
c.	Travel: 55�-0�. 
B.	Drum: 
1.	The hoist shall use a multi layer, multi compartment drum to minimize hoist size. 
2.	The drum shall have grooves parallel to the drum flanges except for two crossover areas symmetrical about the circumference of the drum. 
a.	Each crossover area moves the cable a half of a pitch to give a full pitch of movement for each revolution. 
b.	Approximately 20% of the drums circumference shall be crossover area and 80% of the cable wrap shall be parallel to the drum flanges. 
3.	Cable spooling pattern ensures that each layer of wire rope becomes the groove pattern for the succeeding layer, promoting long rope life and safer operation. 
a.	Successive cable-layers create a pyramid pattern in the parallel sections of the drum. 
b.	This pattern helps to distribute the load evenly across all layers. 
4.	The drum shall ensure smooth efficient and repeatable wire rope spooling. 
5.	The drum shall accommodate the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps of cable. 
6.	Cables shall be retained by a copper swage stop sleeve inside the drum. 
a.	The cable retention system shall allow replacement of lift lines in situ. 
b.	Cables shall be factory installed on the drum and color coded for ease of field installation. 
7.	The pitch diameter of all drums shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio. Load bearing wire rope groove profiles shall meet the recommendations of the "Wire Rope Technical Board�. 
8.	Drum construction shall be a combination of welded and bolted construction. 
a.	In order to prevent unbalanced operation, drum assemblies that exceed 30 rpm shall be straightened to a maximum total indicated run out (T.I.R.) of 0.005 inch (0.127 mm). 
C.	Gearmotor: 
1.	Motor and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer. 
2.	Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation. 
3.	The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm or helical/bevel reducer. 
a.	The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. 
b.	The output shall be a hollow bore with double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. 
c.	The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25 
4.	The motor, brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit from a single manufacturer.  
a.	For enhanced reliability, a continuous shaft shall link the brake, motor armature, and the first stage pinion gear without the use of couplings.  
b.	Design of transmission components between the load and the brakes shall comply with ANSI E1.6-1 and EN 17206. 
D.	Primary Brake: 
1.	The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft.  
a.	No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake. 
2.	Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release.  
a.	The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque. 
3.	The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
E.	Secondary Brake: 
1.	Electric Brake: 
a.	A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. 
1)	This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox. 
2)	The brake shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load. 
b.	This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power to release the brake. 
c.	Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes. 
F.	Bearings: 
1.	Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds. 
2.	Bearings shall be self-aligning flange bearings. 
G.	Limit Switch: 
1.	Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts. 
2.	Rotary limit switch shall be driven by a roller chain. 
a.	Roller chain sprocket shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams.  
b.	The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded. 
3.	Limit switch shall be mounted to the winch frame to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings from the side and the bottom of the hoist. 
H.	Load Monitoring: 
1.	Load information shall be obtained from a solid-state load cell mounted between the frame of the hoist and the head block assembly. 
2.	The cell shall accommodate total hoist loads or changing loads depending on the functions included in the supplied controls. 
I.	Slack Line Detection: 
1.	When a slack line greater than 15 inches is detected: 
a.	Activation of and engagement of the emergency stop circuit. 
b.	Stops motion and prevent further motion in the same direction. 
c.	Signals the PLC and waits for further instruction. 
J.	Optional Continuous Beam: 
1.	The hoist shall integrate with an optional rectangular, tubular-shaped, aluminum extrusion capable of mitigating horizontal loads on the building structure. 
2.	Continuous beam shall provide mounting capabilities for loft blocks to be positioned anywhere along the beam.
2.40	HOIST RIGGING 
A.	5.6 Inch Nylon Loft Block 
1.	Loft Block - 8 Line: 
a.	The sheave shall have a 5.6 inch (142.2 mm) outside diameter. 
1)	Shall be filled nylon. 
2)	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. 
b.	Side plates and mountings shall be one piece formed steel member having a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm). 
1)	Side plates and mountings shall fully enclose the sheave. 
c.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG).total load, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage. 
d.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for eight, 3/16 inch (4.763 mm) lift lines. 
B.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Upright/Underhung 
1.	Loft Block - 1 Line: 
a.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter. 
1)	Shall be filled nylon. 
2)	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. 
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.763 mm) angle. 
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm). 
1)	Side plates shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles. 
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) total load, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage. 
e.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one, 3/16 inch (4.763 mm) lift line. 
C.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Upright/Underhung, 8LN.
1.	Loft Block - 8 Line: 
a.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter. 
1)	Shall be filled nylon. 
2)	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings. 
b.	Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.763 mm) angle. 
c.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm). 
1)	Side plates shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles. 
d.	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 1300 lbs. (598.7 KG) total load, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage. 
e.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for eight, 3/16 inch (4.763 mm) lift lines. 
D.	8 Inch Nylon Loft Block. 
1.	Underhung Loft Block: 
a.	The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter. 
1)	Shall be filled nylon. 
2)	The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. 
b.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange. 
c.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes. 
d.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG). 
e.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift line. 
E.	8 inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung - 8LN. 
1.	Underhung Loft Block - 8 Line: 
a.	The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter. 
1)	Shall be filled nylon.  
2)	The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings. 
b.	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange. 
c.	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inch (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes. 
d.	The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.45 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves. 
e.	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs (317.5 KG). 
f.	Loft blocks shall be grooved for eight, 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift lines. 
F.	Lift Cables: 
1.	All lift cables shall be 7 x 19 construction, galvanized utility cable, sized as required, and with breaking strength as follows: 
a.	3/16 inch (4.77 mm) diameter - 4,200 lbs. (1,905 KG). 
2.	Damaged or deformed cable shall not be used.  
3.	All wire rope rigging shall be installed so as to prevent abrasion of the wire rope against any part of the building construction or other equipment. 
G.	Cable Fittings: 
1.	Swaged sleeve fittings shall be copper Nicopress. 
2.	Aluminum sleeves are not permitted. 
3.	Swaged fittings shall be installed per the fitting manufacturer's instructions, using the appropriate tools, and checked with the appropriate Nicopress "Go - No go" gauge. 
4.	Eyes shall be formed over galvanized steel wire rope thimbles of correct size.  
a.	The thimble shall be grooved to support the cable. 
b.	Shall prevent kinking and deformation. 
H.	Anchor shackles: 
1.	The body shall be a u-shaped fitting with holes at each end to accommodate a pin used to connect a cable, or chain to another device or hanging point.  
2.	The pin has a head at one end and a thread that screws into the body of the shackle at the other end.
2.41	MOTORIZED RIGGING ACCESSORIES
A.	Pipe Batten.
1.	All battens shall be 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) nominal diameter, schedule 40 pipe in lengths as shown on the drawings or Bill of Materials. All joints shall be spliced with 18 inch (457.2 mm) long sleeves with 9 inch (228.6 mm) extending into each pipe and held by two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint.
2.	Each end shall be covered with a bright yellow, closed end, soft vinyl safety cap at least 4 inch (101.6 mm) in length.
B.	Truss Battens.
1.	Two pipe truss battens shall be in lengths as shown on the drawings or Bill of Materials. Truss battens shall be formed from two 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) nominal diameter, schedule 40 pipes, spaced 12 inch (304.8 mm) apart by 1/4 inch by 2 inch (6.4 mm x 50.8 mm) flat bars located a maximum of 5 ft (1.52m) apart and welded between the pipes. All joints shall be spliced with 18 inch (457.2 mm) long sleeves with 9 inch (228.6 mm) extending into each pipe and held by two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint.
2.	Each end shall be covered with a bright yellow, closed end, soft vinyl safety cap at least 4 inch (101.6 mm) in length.
C.	Turnbuckles and Pipe Clamp.
1.	Turnbuckles: Turnbuckles.
a.	Turnbuckles shall be drop forged and galvanized, and conform to ASTM F-1145 Type 1, Grade 1 standard. Turnbuckles shall be moused after adjustment to prevent loosening.
2.	Pipe Clamps: Pipe Clamps.
a.	Full Pipe Clamps:
b.	Pipe clamps shall be made of two strips of 12 Ga. (2.780 mm) by 2 inch (50.8 mm) hot rolled steel formed to encompass and clamp the pipe batten to prevent its rotation. Corners shall be rounded.
c.	There shall be a 3/8 inch x 1 inch (9.525 mm x 25.4 mm) hex bolt with lock nut above and below the batten. A 5/8 inch (15.875 mm) hole in the top of each clamp half allows the attachment of cable, chain, or other fittings.
d.	Full pipe clamps shall have a manufacturer's recommended load rating of at least 750 lbs (340.2 KG).
D.	Trim Chains: Trim Chains.
1.	Trim chains shall be 36 inch (914.4 mm) long, made of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) plated, grade 30 Proof Coil chain. Connection between the end link and the lifting cable shall be made with a thimble and copper Nicopress sleeve. Chains shall be wrapped one and one half turns around the batten and attached back to the thimble at the end of the lift line with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) forged shackle. Adjustment is made by connecting the shackle into a link along the return side of the chain.
2.	Trim chains shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs (340 KG).
E.	Trim Chains: Alloy Trim Chains.
1.	Trim chains shall be 36 inch (914 mm) long, made of 7 mm, Grade 63, hardened alloy chain meeting OSHA 1910.184(e)(5). The chain shall have a RWL of 3,250 lbs(1,474 KG), shall be manufactured in the United States and have a black finish to eliminate glare. Each link is marked with the manufacturer's code and every 10th link has date code for traceability.
2.	Connection between the end link and the lifting cable shall be made with a thimble and copper Nicopress sleeve.
3.	Chains shall be wrapped one and one half turns around the batten and attached back to the thimble at the end of the lift line with a 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch (6.4 mm to 9.5 mm) forged shackle. Adjustment is made by connecting the forged shackle into a link along the return side of the chain.
4.	Trim chains shall have a recommended working load of at least 750lbs (340.2 KG). when attached to 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), 7x19 GUC.
F.	Batten Trim Plate:
1.	Screw Pin Shackles: Shackles are u-shaped fittings with holes at each end to accommodate a pin to connect a rope, cable, or chain to another device. The pin has a head at one end and a thread at the other that screws into the body of the shackle. Shackle shall be from a U.S. manufacturer, and shall be moused after final trim adjustment.
2.	Trim Plate Assembly: Trim plate assembly consists of a batten clamp and plate punched with holes to receive 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hardware, and 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) screw pin shackles.
a.	The plate shall be punched with five trim holes and one pick point hole to receive 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hardware.
b.	The trim holes shall be positioned to allow for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) variations in trim height.
c.	Trim plate assembly shall be able to support up to 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per pick point.
d.	Trim plate assembly shall have the ability to be adjusted without the use of tools.
G.	Batten Trim Clamp:
1.	Batten trim clamps shall consist of two pipe clamps, each made of two strips of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) by 2 inch (50.8 mm) hot rolled steel formed to encompass and clamp the pipe batten to prevent its rotation. Corners shall be rounded. There shall be a 3/8 inch x 1 inch (9.52 mm x 25.4 mm) hex bolt with lock nut above and below the batten. A 5/8 inch (15.87 mm) hole in the top of one clamp half allows the attachment of cable, chain, or other fittings. The other clamp shall be fitted with a Nylon or aluminum grooved spacer with a minimum 2 inch (50.8 mm) diameter.
2.	Line adjustment shall be made by loosening the end clamp and sliding it along the batten or by adjusting the turnbuckle if so equipped.
3.	Trim clamps shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG).
H.	Lift Cables:
1.	All lift cables shall be 7 x 19 construction, galvanized utility cable, sized as required, and with breaking strengths as follows:
a.	1/8 inch (3.17 mm) diameter - 2,000 lbs. (907 KG).
b.	3/16 inch (4.77 mm) diameter - 4,200 lbs. (1,905 KG).
c.	1/4 inch (6.35 mm) diameter - 7,000 lbs. (3,175 KG).
d.	5/16 inch (7.94 mm) diameter - 9,800 lbs. (4445 KG).
e.	3/8 inch (9.52 mm) diameter - 14,400 lbs. (6,532 KG).
2.	Damaged or deformed cable shall not be used. All wire rope rigging shall be installed so as to prevent abrasion of the wire rope against any part of the building construction or other equipment.
I.	Cable Fittings:
1.	Cable clips shall conform to wire rope manufacturer's recommendations as to size, number, and method of installation. Clips shall be drop forged, made in the United States per Federal Specification FF-C-450, Type 1, Class 1. Under no circumstances may malleable cable clips be used in suspension or lifting lines.
2.	Swaged sleeve fittings shall be copper Nicopress. Aluminum sleeves are not permitted. Swaged fittings shall be installed per the fitting manufacturer's instructions, using the appropriate tools, and checked with the appropriate Nicopress "Go - No go" gauge.
3.	Eyes shall be formed over galvanized steel, wire rope thimbles of correct size. It is grooved to support the rope or cable and prevent kinking and deformation.
4.	Anchor shackles are u-shaped fittings with holes at each end to accommodate a pin used to connect a rope, cable, or chain to another device or hanging point. The pin has a head at one end and a cotter pin at the other end, a thread that screws into the body of the shackle, or a thread, nut and cotter pin at the other end.
J.	Emergency Stop Circuit:
1.	The emergency stop system shall meet NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) and directly remove power by means of electromechanical components, using a UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
2.	The emergency stop circuit shall be a normally closed circuit or a supervised circuit that provides the same or greater level of reliability and security. Its operations shall not depend on software or semiconductors.
3.	Resetting the emergency stop circuit shall not initiate motion.
4.	Emergency Stop switches shall all look similar and operate in an identical manner. All fixed and portable control panels shall include an emergency stop operator. Additional switches shall be provided as shown or required for safety.
K.	Production Lighting Distribution:
1.	This assembly shall consist of an extruded aluminum wireway, 2-1/2 inch (63.5 mm) x 3-3/8 inch (85.7 mm) in cross section, and in lengths up to twenty feet. It shall contain a terminal strip for feed wire extending to outlets (flush mount or pigtail), as specified.
2.	Connector strip housing shall be fabricated of black extruded aluminum wireway with interlocking cover sections to exceed UL 1573 standards. Housing shall be inherently rustproof.
3.	Connector strip shall have an electrostatic paint finish in black, with outlets identified by 2 inch (50.8 mm) high die-cut circuit identification numbers on the vertical surface of the strip.
4.	The strip shall contain 125 degrees Celsius XLP wiring of the proper sizes and quantities to connect the individual outlets to the terminal blocks in up to sixteen 20 Amp circuits.
5.	The terminal blocks shall be molded barrier type with screw lugs suitable for connecting incoming wire. Terminal blocks can accept up to #10 gauge wire.
6.	Connector strips shall be supplied with 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) steel C-channel mounting brackets. Brackets shall be 60 inch (1.524 m) on centers. U-bolts shall be supplied to grip up to 2 inch (50.8 mm) O.D. standard steel pipe.
7.	The entire assembly shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
8.	Options available shall be color, LED indicator lights, low voltage raceway, custom circuit identification, and DMX input/output.
9.	Refer to lighting drawings for circuit quantities and locations.
L.	Cable Reel:
1.	Frame:
a.	The frame shall be of formed and welded construction fabricated of heavy steel plate suitable for use under severe operating conditions.
b.	Bearings shall be oversized, precision ball-type or roller-type, self-aligning, sealed, and pre-lubricated.
c.	Gears, if needed, shall be used in lieu of chain and sprocket.
d.	The frame and spool shall have a mechanical spool lock for safety and repair when multiple springs are required.
2.	Spool:
a.	The spool flanges shall have a formed offset near the outer periphery to stiffen the disk and to assist in directing the cable onto the spool.
b.	For increased protection and to assist directing the cable onto the spool, the spool shall have outer hoop guides.
c.	The spool drum diameter shall be field adjustable to allow a change in reel capacity if cable diameter or the application is changed.
d.	The spool main shaft shall be heavy-duty cast iron.
3.	Springs:
a.	All main springs shall be used in parallel sequence to insure continual operation if one spring should fail. All springs shall be encased in individual canisters with broken spring indicator and not weigh more than 60 lbs. each.
b.	Springs shall be mounted outside the spool for easy replacement.
c.	Springs hubs shall be designed with back-winding feature to prevent breakage if spool is back-wound.
4.	Collector:
a.	Collector shall be a complete component with rings and brushes as one unit.
b.	Collector enclosure shall be NEMA rated.
c.	Collector to be mounted outboard of the spool for easy removal without removing the cable from the spool.
d.	Collector rings shall be fabricated of copper or sintered copper with high-temperature lead wire.
e.	Brushes shall be metallic-type containing 80-90 percent copper with graphite as a lubricant.
5.	Paint finish shall be baked-on polyester finish, 1.5 to 2.0 mils thick.
M.	Pantograph Cable Management:
1.	Pantograph shall accommodate up to (64) 12 Ga conductors and up to (2) data cables.
a.	Up to (8) 8 conductor flat cables.
1)	Maximum capacity of (25) 120 Volt, 20 amp circuits utilizing (1) 12 Ga ground conductor for every (2) 20 amp circuits.
b.	Data Cable:
1)	Data cable shall be DMX.
2)	Data cable shall be CAT5.
2.	Pantograph shall be constructed with a physical barrier between the power supply and data cables within the channel.
3.	The pantograph shall consist of a series powder coated aluminum channels hinged to each other to allow the entire distance of travel required by the batten, up to a 52 feet (15.8 m) fully extended length.
4.	The top arm shall be connected to a moving trolley.
5.	Pantograph shall fit between lift lines spacing greater than 8 feet -6 inch (2591 mm) and less than 11 feet - 0 inch (3353 mm).
6.	Pantograph fully retracted height shall be no greater than 25 inch (635 mm) vertical.
7.	Pantograph shall mount to a 1.5 inch (38 mm) schedule 40 pipe batten.
8.	Pantograph shall travel at a maximum speed of 30 feet per minute (9 meters per second).
9.	System includes power and data strain reliefs for top and bottom.
10.	System shall include grid junction box to be installed by electrical contractor.
2.42	MOTION CONTROL SYSTEMS
A.	Rigging Control System:
1.	Push Button Wall Mounted Controller.
2.	Push Button Pendant.
3.	Vantis Pendant Controller.
4.	Vantis Wall Controller.
5.	Vantis Mobile Console.
6.	Vantis Desk Console.
B.	Push Button Control Station.
1.	Control stations shall be wall mounted NEMA 1 enclosures, containing hold-to-run Up and Down pushbuttons for each hoist. A key operated On / Off switch with green LED indicating "Power On" shall be provided.
2.	A red, mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, which shall disconnect power to the hoist through a circuit meeting NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) requirements.
3.	A "Service" indicator shall be provided to alert the user when regular system service is required.
4.	Panel components including pushbuttons, key switches, switches, E-stop switches, and the like shall be industrial grade, heavy-duty components with 7/8 inch (22 mm) operators. Indicators shall be 5/16 inch (8 mm) minimum diameter.
5.	Panel components shall be Telemecanique / Square D ZB series or Allen Bradley Bulletin 800 mR.
C.	Push Button Pendant Control.
1.	Control pendants shall consist of a safety yellow pendant, Telemecanique XAC series or equal, and a wall mounted receptacle station. The pendant shall be provided with 25 feet (7.62 m) control cable with strain relief at both ends, and a latching connector with a metal body.
2.	The pendant shall contain hold-to-run Up and Down pushbuttons for the hoist.
3.	A red, mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, which shall disconnect power to the hoist through a circuit meeting NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) requirements.
4.	Panel components shall be Telemecanique ZA2 series or equal.
D.	VANTIS Pendant Controller
1.	Controller shall include a 30 foot long cable to enable user to move around the stage.
a.	Systems that require the user to initiate motion or make axes selections at a stationary controller shall not be accepted. 
b.	Enclosure 
1)	Controller shall be housed in a sturdy aluminum enclosure and anodized black. 
c.	Touchscreen 
1)	Controller shall have a 3.5� color touchscreen. 
d.	Operators 
1)	Controller shall include an illuminated �GO� button with hold-to-run operation. 
2)	Controller shall include a hard wired ESTOP operator. 
3)	Controller shall include a dial for operation of variable speed axis and also functions as a user input device.
2.	Operation:
a.	The controller shall be wholly contained within a hand-held pendant with the ability to control up to 8 axes.
b.	The controller shall have the ability to control both fixed and variable speed machines. 
c.	Controller shall have two methods of initiating motion
1)	Jog Mode
a)	User can select one or more axis in a single direction at default speed including UP, DOWN, OPEN, and CLOSE.
1)	Axis that OPEN and CLOSE cannot be operated at the same time as AXIS that move UP and DOWN
2)	Targeting
a)	Axis with targeting capabilities shall have four user programmable targets in addition to end of travel targets.
1)	Targets shall be named A, B, C, and D for each axis
2)	Multiple axes can be moved to its own target at the same time.
d.	Variable Speed
1)	When operating one axis that has variable speed capabilities the speed can be controlled by rotating the dial. The speed shall be displayed on the touchscreen in the form of a speedometer. Speed adjustment shall be in increments of 5% of axis max speed.
e.	Load Sensing
1)	The controller shall protect against overload and provide a method for load learning on axes with load sensing capabilities.
f.	Log-in/User Profiles
1)	System shall remain locked until a registered pin is entered. 
2)	System shall enable or disable certain functions depending on which user/pin has been entered. 
a)	Functions that can be tailored by user include:
1)	Target recording
2)	Disable a specific axis or axes
3)	Load sensing options
b)	Systems that do not provide user specific capabilities shall not be accepted.
g.	Dynamic feedback
1)	The system shall provide the user a clear indication of which sets are selected 
2)	The system shall provide the user a clear indication of the direction in which each selected set will travel when the �GO� button is pressed.
3)	System shall indicate when an axis is at a target or end of travel.
4)	Orchestra shell axes shall provide the user feedback as to whether the shell is stored or deployed.
h.	Constraints
1)	The system shall be able to limit or lock out travel based on various conditions including shell deployment and axis position. A factory authorized technician is required to enable access to these features.
3.	Receptacle
a.	The pendant shall connect to the system vie a wall mounted receptacle.
b.	The receptacle shall be a single connector.
1)	Systems requiring multiple connectors shall not be accepted.
c.	A key switch shall be included on the receptacle to prevent unauthorized use.
E.	VANTIS Wall Controller: 
1.	Enclosure:  Available as either of the following. 
a.	Wall Mount - Inside a 24� H x 24� W x 9.5� D enclosure. 
b.	Rack Mount - Standard 6U 19� rack mount. 
2.	Touchscreen: 
a.	Controller shall have a 10.1� 1920 x 1200 color touchscreen. 
3.	Operators: 
a.	Controller shall include an illuminated �GO� button with hold-to-run operation. 
b.	Controller shall include a hard wired ESTOP operator. 
c.	Controller shall include a speed wheel for selection of speed while variable speed machine. 
d.	Controller shall include (2) USB-C ports. 
e.	Controller shall include a Remote Operator Pendant receptacle. 
4.	Front Panel shall be able to tilt to reduce glare and improve visibility. 
5.	Remote Operator Pendant: 
a.	Remote Operator Pendant shall provide the ability to initiate motion that has been set on the Wall Controller. 
b.	Remote Operator Pendant shall include a 30� cable. 
c.	Remote Operator Pendant shall include an illuminated �GO� button with hold-to-run operation. 
d.	Remote Operator Pendant shall include a hard wired ESTOP operator. 
6.	Operation: 
a.	Capabilities: 
1)	The controller shall have the ability to control up to (24) machines. 
2)	The controller shall have the ability to control both fixed and variable speed machines. 
3)	The controller shall be specifically designed to control overhead hoists, acoustic banners, travelers, and stage lifts.  Additional machine types can be controlled as specified. 
b.	Log-in/User Profiles: 
1)	System shall remain locked until a registered pin is entered.  
2)	System shall enable or disable certain functions depending on which user is logged in. 
3)	Systems that do not provide user specific capabilities shall not be accepted. 
c.	Basic Operation: 
1)	Each machine shall be depicted with a button that shows machine name and current position. 
2)	Machine selection shall be made via user touch input of the machine name button. System shall clearly indicate which machines are selected. 
3)	UP and DOWN buttons will be available to move one or more machines in a single direction. 
4)	Anytime a machine is selected with an end position, the end position shall be clearly shown on the machine�s button. 
d.	Targets: 
1)	A target is a stored position for a single machine. 
2)	Controller shall have (8) user recordable targets per machine (A-H). 
3)	Each target may be given a unique name by the user. 
e.	Presets: 
1)	A preset is a group of machines with stored positions for each machine. Selecting a preset will select all machines in the preset and load the stored positions. 
2)	Preset Record:  System shall allow the user to record presets by taking a snapshot of selected machines.  System shall allow users to build presets using stored targets and custom positions. 
f.	Variable Speed: 
1)	For variable speed machines, speed can be controlled by rotating the speed wheel. The speed shall be displayed on the touchscreen in the form of a speedometer. Speed adjustment shall be in increments of 5% of machine max speed. 
g.	Load Sensing: 
1)	The controller shall protect against overload and provide a method for load learning on machines with load sensing capabilities. 
2)	Load Learning: 
a)	System shall guide user through the load learn process to ensure the load window is set properly. 
b)	In the event of a load fault system shall guide the user to correct the error via on-screen instruction and adjust load window as required.
h.	Dynamic Feedback: 
1)	The system shall provide the user a clear indication of which machines are selected.  
2)	The system shall provide the user a clear indication of the direction in which each selected machine will travel when the �GO� button is pressed. 
3)	System shall indicate when a machine is at a target or end of travel 
4)	Orchestra shell ceiling machines shall provide the user feedback as to whether the shell is stored or deployed. 
i.	Constraints: 
1)	The system shall be able to limit or lock out travel based on various conditions, including shell deployment and machine position. A factory authorized technician is required to enable access to these features. 
j.	Travel Adjust 
1)	System shall allow the user to set temporary travel limits to accommodate the attachment of equipment to the moving machinery. 
2)	Travel limits shall be available for both directions of travel. 
7.	Settings: 
a.	Machine Setting: 
1)	User shall be able to disable a machine. 
2)	User shall be able to adjust acceleration, deceleration, and speed within factorable allowable ranges. 
b.	Machine Groups: 
1)	System shall provide the ability to group two or more machines together. 
2)	Group types include: 
a)	Locked Groups: 
1)	Machines must travel together at all times.  
2)	System will select entire group whenever any machine in the group is selected. 
3)	If any machine within the group faults all will stop motion. 
4)	If at any point machines� position deviates from required tolerance all machines will stop motion. System shall guide the user in correcting the fault. 
b)	Offset Group: 
1)	If at any point machines� position deviates from required tolerance all machines will stop motion.  System shall guide the user in correcting the fault. 
c)	Fault Group: 
1)	If any machine within the group faults all will stop motion. 
c.	User Settings 
1)	System shall allow machine access to be tailored by user. 
2)	System shall allow the ability to restrict variable speed control by user. 
3)	System shall allow the ability to restrict preset/target record by user. 
4)	System shall allow the ability to restrict system settings by user. 
5)	System shall allow the ability to restrict machine settings by user. 
d.	System Settings 
1)	User can adjust units of measure to the following: 
a)	Weight:  Kilograms, Pounds. 
b)	Position:  Feet-Inches, Decimal Feet, Decimal Inches, Decimal Meters, Millimeters. 
2)	User can adjust screen brightness. 
3)	Maximum Machines:   
a)	System can be configured to limit the number of machines that can move at one time.  Limits can be specific to type of machines.  
b)	System shall have a location to record date of last inspection and provide the user with a reminder when the next inspection is recommended. 
e.	Log File: 
1)	System shall record all actions taken on the console in a log file which can be viewed either on the console or exported to assist in remote. 
F.	VANTIS Mobile Console:
1.	Enclosure:  15� w x 3-7/8� d x 9-1/2� h.
a.	Handheld console allows operator to move around the stage to see moving equipment 
2.	Touchscreen:
a.	Console shall have a 12" 1920 x 1200 color touchscreen.
3.	Operators:
a.	Console shall include illuminated "GO" and �STOP� buttons
b.	Console shall include a 3 position hold to run (HTR) toggle including:
1)	Released (HTR Off) which prevents movement
2)	Pressed lightly (HTR On) which allows movement
3)	Pressed tightly (HTR Off) which prevents movement
c.	Console shall include a hard wired ESTOP operator.
d.	Console shall include a joystick for jogging as well as adjustment of speed while variable speed machines are in motion.
e.	Console shall include USB-C ports for the connecting of accessories such as a mouse, keyboard or USB key.
4.	Operation:
a.	Capabilities:
1)	The console shall have the ability to control up to (35) machines.
2)	The console shall have the ability to control both fixed and variable speed machines.
3)	The console shall be specifically designed to control overhead hoists, acoustic banners, travelers, and stage lifts.  Additional machine types can be controlled as specified.
b.	Log-in/User Profiles:
1)	System shall include 3 standard user profiles including
a)	Admin (allows access to all user capabilities)
b)	Rigger (allows access to most user capabilities)
c)	Operator (allows access to the most basic user capabilities)
2)	System shall allow the creation of additional unique user IDs and passwords 
a)	Unique IDs can be tailored to restrict/allow specific capabilities
3)	System shall remain locked until a registered pin is entered.
4)	System shall enable or disable certain functions depending on which user is logged in.
5)	Systems that do not provide user specific capabilities shall not be accepted.
c.	Basic Operation:
1)	Each machine shall be depicted with a button that shows machine name and current position.
2)	Machine selection shall be made via user touch input of the machine name button. System shall clearly indicate which machines are selected.
3)	UP and DOWN (IN and OUT) buttons will be available to move one or more machines in a single direction.
4)	Anytime a machine is selected with an end position, the end position shall be clearly shown on the machine's button.
d.	Targets:
1)	A target is a stored position for a single machine.
2)	Console shall have (8) user recordable targets per machine (A-H).
3)	Each target may be given a unique name by the user.
4)	A user may create a single use custom target
5)	A user may create a single use relative target that allows the machine to move a specific amount of travel above or below the machine�s current position.
e.	Presets:
1)	A preset is a group of machines with stored positions for each machine. Selecting a preset will select all machines in the preset and load the stored positions.
2)	Preset Record:  System shall allow the user to record presets by using current position of selected machines.  System shall allow users to build presets using stored targets and custom positions.
f.	Variable Speed:
1)	For variable speed machines, speed can be controlled by toggling the joystick when or prior to a machine in motion. The speed shall be displayed on the touchscreen in the form of a speedometer. Speed adjustment shall be in increments of 5% of machine max speed.
g.	Load Sensing:
1)	The Console shall protect against machine overload and provide a method for load learning on machines with load sensing capabilities.
2)	Load Learning:
a)	System shall guide user through the load learn process to ensure the load operation window is set properly.
b)	In the event of a load fault, system shall guide the user to correct the error via on-screen instruction and adjust load operation window as required.
h.	Dynamic Feedback:
1)	The system shall provide the user a clear indication of which machines are selected.
2)	The system shall provide the user a clear indication of the direction in which each selected machine will travel when the "GO" button is pressed.
3)	System shall indicate when a machine is at a target or end of travel
4)	Orchestra shell ceiling machines shall provide the user feedback as to whether the shell is stored or deployed.
i.	Constraints:
1)	The system shall be able to limit or lock out travel based on various conditions, including shell deployment and machine position. A factory authorized technician is required to enable access to these features.
j.	Travel Adjust:
1)	The system shall allow the user to set temporary soft limits to accommodate the attachment of equipment such as scenery, soft goods and SO cable in order to avoid collision or damage to the equipment.
2)	Travel soft limits shall be available for both directions of travel.
5.	Settings:
a.	Machine Setting:
1)	User shall be able to disable a machine�s operation from the control console.
2)	Specified users shall be able to adjust acceleration, deceleration, and speed within factory allowable ranges.
3)	Specified users shall be able to disable load faulting on a machine
b.	Machine Groups:
1)	System shall provide the ability to group two or more machines together.
2)	User will be able to apply a specific name and color to a group 
3)	Group types include:
a)	Locked Groups:
1)	Machines within a locked group must travel together at all times.
2)	The console will select all machines within the locked group whenever any machine in the group is selected.
3)	If any machine within the locked group faults, all machines within the group will stop motion.
4)	If at any point a machines' position deviates from specified tolerance within the locked group, all machines will stop motion. The console shall guide the user in correcting the fault.
b)	Fault Group:
1)	Machines can travel independently within a fault group.
2)	Machines can be selected individually within a fault group.
3)	If any machine within a fault group faults, all machines within the group will stop motion.  The console shall guide the user in correcting the fault.
c.	User Settings:
1)	System shall allow machine access to be tailored by user.
2)	System shall allow the ability to restrict variable speed control by user.
3)	System shall allow the ability to restrict preset/target record by user.
4)	System shall allow the ability to restrict system settings by user.
5)	System shall allow the ability to restrict machine settings by user.
d.	Application Settings:
1)	User can adjust units of measure to the following:
a)	Weight:  Kilograms, Pounds.
b)	Position:  Feet-Inches, Decimal Feet, Decimal Inches, Decimal Meters, Millimeters.
2)	User can adjust screen brightness.
3)	Maximum Machines:
a)	System can be configured to limit the number of machines that can move at one time.  Limits can be specific to type of machines.
e.	About:
1)	System will have an about page denoting the following:
a)	Venue name
b)	Project Location
c)	Project number
d)	Project name
e)	Consultant (if applicable)
f)	Installer of theatrical equipment
g)	Wenger Service phone number
h)	Date of last inspection
i)	Inspector Name
j)	Inspector company
k)	System shall have a reminder when the next inspection is recommended.
f.	Log File:
1)	The system shall record all actions in a log file which can be viewed either on the console or exported to assist in remote troubleshooting.
g.	Show Setting:
1)	Users can create New Shows
2)	Users can Open previously saved shows on the hard drive or USB
3)	Users can delete previously saved shows
4)	Users can save previously saved shows as a new name
h.	Sequences:
1)	User can save, delete or manage cued sequences
2)	Sequences are imported from Show Mode when creating a new cue
6.	Show Mode
a.	Cueing:
1)	The user can create an unlimited number of cues per show
a)	Users can delete, duplicate, rename, renumber, and reorganize cues as needed
b)	Users can disable cues
c)	Users must load a cue and engage the hold to run for a cue to execute with the �go� button
2)	Time Calculation / Motion Profiles within a cue
a)	Users can adjust the speed and velocity of each variable machine within a cue
b)	The user may enter a new speed within the allowable speed range of that machine within a cue.  
1)	The time field will update to display the amount of time required to implement the machine�s movement.
c)	The user may enter a new time for a machine execute its movement within a cue.
1)	The speed and velocity field will update based on the allowable speed range of that machine.  
d)	If the time/speed entered by the user is not possible, the console will default to the closest time/speed.
e)	Delays
1)	Users may add a delay to a machine�s motion within a cue
f)	Top of Show Snapshot (Time/Speed reference point)
1)	Users will be able to create a reference point to calculate Time/Speed for all machines before they are utilized in a cue.  
a)	Once a machine has been written in a cue, Time/Speed in subsequent cues will be calculated based on a machine�s last recorded position.
2)	The reference point is automatically recorded when a New Show is created based on all the machines� current locations. 
3)	The user may change the reference point by 
a)	Moving each machine into their desired position and recording a new Snapshot
b)	Going into the Snapshot builder and manually typing in each machine�s required position 
3)	Cue Linking:
a)	Auto-Load:
1)	Users can link cues in succession that will automatically load once the initial cue has been executed.
2)	Users can trigger the linked cue before the previous cue has completed.
3)	The user will need to engage the hold to run in order to execute the linked cue.
b)	Auto-Follow:
1)	Users can link cues in succession that will automatically load once the initial cue has been executed.  The linked cues will automatically run once the initial cue has completed or based on timing/location of a specified machine.
2)	Users can trigger the linked cue before the previous cue has completed.
3)	The user will need to engage the hold to run in order to execute the linked cue including any delay that has been loaded into the auto-follow.
4)	Recover Cue:
a)	Users will be able to reset all machines to their position prior to a cue to allow a cue to be executed out of show order
b)	Recovering a cue can be achieved by moving all machines at once or individually to avoid collision.
5)	Warnings/Notes:
a)	Users will be able to create and display unique notes for each cue
b)	Users will be able to create unique warnings for each cue that display when a cue is loaded.  Users will have to acknowledge the warning before a cue loads.
G.	VANTIS Desk Console:
1.	Enclosure:  17� w x 26� d x 2 3/4� h (without touch screen)
2.	Touchscreen:
a.	Console shall have a 22" 1920 x 1080 color touchscreen.
3.	Operators:
a.	Console shall include illuminated "GO" and �STOP� buttons
b.	Console shall include a 3 position hold to run (HTR) toggle including:
1)	Released (HTR Off) which prevents movement
2)	Pressed lightly (HTR On) which allows movement
3)	Pressed tightly (HTR Off) which prevents movement
c.	Console shall include a hard wired ESTOP operator.
d.	Console shall include a joystick for jogging as well as adjustment of speed while variable speed machines are in motion.
e.	Console shall include USB-C ports for the connecting of accessories such as a mouse, keyboard or USB key.
4.	Operation:
a.	Capabilities:
1)	The console shall have the ability to control up to (54) machines.
2)	The console shall have the ability to control both fixed and variable speed machines.
3)	The console shall be specifically designed to control overhead hoists, acoustic banners, travelers, and stage lifts.  Additional machine types can be controlled as specified.
b.	Log-in/User Profiles:
1)	System shall include 3 standard user profiles including
a)	Admin (allows access to all user capabilities)
b)	Rigger (allows access to most user capabilities)
c)	Operator (allows access to the most basic user capabilities)
2)	System shall allow the creation of additional unique user IDs and passwords 
a)	Unique IDs can be tailored to restrict/allow specific capabilities
3)	System shall remain locked until a registered pin is entered.
4)	System shall enable or disable certain functions depending on which user is logged in.
5)	Systems that do not provide user specific capabilities shall not be accepted.
c.	Basic Operation:
1)	Each machine shall be depicted with a button that shows machine name and current position.
2)	Machine selection shall be made via user touch input of the machine name button. System shall clearly indicate which machines are selected.
3)	UP and DOWN (IN and OUT) buttons will be available to move one or more machines in a single direction.
4)	Anytime a machine is selected with an end position, the end position shall be clearly shown on the machine's button.
d.	Targets:
1)	A target is a stored position for a single machine.
2)	Console shall have (8) user recordable targets per machine (A-H).
3)	Each target may be given a unique name by the user.
4)	A user may create a single use custom target
5)	A user may create a single use relative target that allows the machine to move a specific amount of travel above or below the machine�s current position.
e.	Presets:
1)	A preset is a group of machines with stored positions for each machine. Selecting a preset will select all machines in the preset and load the stored positions.
2)	Preset Record:  System shall allow the user to record presets by using current position of selected machines.  System shall allow users to build presets using stored targets and custom positions.
f.	Variable Speed:
1)	For variable speed machines, speed can be controlled by toggling the joystick when or prior to a machine in motion. The speed shall be displayed on the touchscreen in the form of a speedometer. Speed adjustment shall be in increments of 5% of machine max speed.
g.	Load Sensing:
1)	The Console shall protect against machine overload and provide a method for load learning on machines with load sensing capabilities.
2)	Load Learning:
a)	System shall guide user through the load learn process to ensure the load operation window is set properly.
b)	In the event of a load fault, system shall guide the user to correct the error via on-screen instruction and adjust load operation window as required.
h.	Dynamic Feedback:
1)	The system shall provide the user a clear indication of which machines are selected.
2)	The system shall provide the user a clear indication of the direction in which each selected machine will travel when the "GO" button is pressed.
3)	System shall indicate when a machine is at a target or end of travel
4)	Orchestra shell ceiling machines shall provide the user feedback as to whether the shell is stored or deployed.
i.	Constraints:
1)	The system shall be able to limit or lock out travel based on various conditions, including shell deployment and machine position. A factory authorized technician is required to enable access to these features.
j.	Travel Adjust
1)	The system shall allow the user to set temporary soft limits to accommodate the attachment of equipment such as scenery, soft goods and SO cable in order to avoid collision or damage to the equipment.
2)	Travel soft limits shall be available for both directions of travel.
5.	Settings:
a.	Machine Setting:
1)	User shall be able to disable a machine�s operation from the control console.
2)	Specified users shall be able to adjust acceleration, deceleration, and speed within factory allowable ranges.
3)	Specified users shall be able to disable load faulting on a machine
b.	Machine Groups:
1)	System shall provide the ability to group two or more machines together.
2)	User will be able to apply a specific name and color to a group
3)	Group types include:
a)	Locked Groups:
1)	Machines within a locked group must travel together at all times.
2)	The console will select all machines within the locked group whenever any machine in the group is selected.
3)	If any machine within the locked group faults, all machines within the group will stop motion.
4)	If at any point a machines' position deviates from specified tolerance within the locked group, all machines will stop motion. The console shall guide the user in correcting the fault.
b)	Fault Group:
1)	Machines can travel independently within a fault group.
2)	Machines can be selected individually within a fault group.
3)	If any machine within a fault group faults, all machines within the group will stop motion.  The console shall guide the user in correcting the fault.
c.	User Settings:
1)	System shall allow machine access to be tailored by user.
2)	System shall allow the ability to restrict variable speed control by user.
3)	System shall allow the ability to restrict preset/target record by user.
4)	System shall allow the ability to restrict system settings by user.
5)	System shall allow the ability to restrict machine settings by user.
d.	Application Settings:
1)	User can adjust units of measure to the following:
a)	Weight:  Kilograms, Pounds.
b)	Position:  Feet-Inches, Decimal Feet, Decimal Inches, Decimal Meters, Millimeters.
2)	User can adjust screen brightness.
3)	Maximum Machines:
a)	System can be configured to limit the number of machines that can move at one time.  Limits can be specific to type of machines.
e.	About:
1)	System will have an about page denoting the following:
a)	Venue name
b)	Project Location
c)	Project number
d)	Project name
e)	Consultant (if applicable)
f)	Installer of theatrical equipment 
g)	Wenger Service phone number
h)	Date of last inspection
i)	Inspector Name
j)	Inspector company
k)	System shall have a reminder when the next inspection is recommended.
f.	Log File:
1)	The system shall record all actions in a log file which can be viewed either on the console or exported to assist in remote troubleshooting.
g.	Show Setting
1)	Users can create New Shows
2)	Users can Open previously saved shows on the hard drive or USB
3)	Users can delete previously saved shows
4)	Users can save previously saved shows as a new name
h.	Sequences
1)	User can save, delete or manage cued sequences
2)	Sequences are imported from Show Mode when creating a new cue
6.	Show Mode
a.	Cueing:
1)	The user can create an unlimited number of cues per show
a)	Users can delete, duplicate, rename, renumber, and reorganize cues as needed
b)	Users can disable cues
c)	Users must load a cue and engage the hold to run for a cue to execute with the �go� button
2)	Time Calculation / Motion Profiles within a cue
a)	Users can adjust the speed and velocity of each variable machine within a cue
b)	The user may enter a new speed within the allowable speed range of that machine within a cue.
1)	The time field will update to display the amount of time required to implement the machine�s movement.
c)	The user may enter a new time for a machine execute its movement within a cue.
1)	The speed and velocity field will update based on the allowable speed range of that machine.
d)	If the time/speed entered by the user is not possible, the console will default to the closest time/speed.
e)	Delays
1)	Users may add a delay to a machine�s motion within a cue
f)	Top of Show Snapshot (Time/Speed reference point)
1)	Users will be able to create a reference point to calculate Time/Speed for all machines before they are utilized in a cue.  
a)	Once a machine has been written in a cue, Time/Speed in subsequent cues will be calculated based on a machine�s last recorded position.
2)	The reference point is automatically recorded when a New Show is created based on all the machines� current locations.
3)	The user may change the reference point by 
a)	Moving each machine into their desired position and recording a new Snapshot
b)	Going into the Snapshot builder and manually typing in each machine�s required position
3)	Cue Linking:
a)	Auto-Load:
1)	Users can link cues in succession that will automatically load once the initial cue has been executed.
2)	Users can trigger the linked cue before the previous cue has completed.
3)	The user will need to engage the hold to run in order to execute the linked cue.
b)	Auto-Follow:
1)	Users can link cues in succession that will automatically load once the initial cue has been executed.  The linked cues will automatically run once the initial cue has completed or based on timing/location of a specified machine. 
2)	Users can trigger the linked cue before the previous cue has completed. 
3)	The user will need to engage the hold to run in order to execute the linked cue including any delay that has been loaded into the auto-follow. 
4)	Recover Cue: 
a)	Users will be able to reset all machines to their position prior to a cue to allow a cue to be executed out of show order 
b)	Recovering a cue can be achieved by moving all machines at once or individually to avoid collision. 
5)	Warnings/Notes: 
a)	Users will be able to create and display unique notes for each cue 
b)	Users will be able to create unique warnings for each cue that display when a cue is loaded.  Users will have to acknowledge the warning before a cue loads.  
2.43	STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
A.	Tracks:
1.	Product: 280 Track.
2.	Product: 170 Track.
3.	Product: 140 Curved Track.
4.	Product: 142 Walk Along Track.
5.	Product: 500 Curved Track.
6.	Product: Roller Chain Track.
7.	Product: Curtain Machine (Standard).
8.	Product: Curtain Machine (HD).
B.	Stage Curtains:
1.	Description and Sizes: As shown on drawings.
2.	Fabric Types:
a.	Fabric: 32 oz. Imperial Velour, 100 percent polyester IFR velour, KM Fabrics, standard color to be selected.
b.	Fabric: 25 oz. Charisma Velour, 100 percent polyester IFR velour, KM Fabrics, standard color to be selected.
c.	Fabric: 20 oz. Crescent Velour, 100 percent polyester IFR velour, KM Fabrics, color - black.
d.	Fabric: PD Cloth, 100 percent polyester IFR, Dazian, color - black.
e.	Fabric: Seamless Sharkstooth Scrim, 100 percent Cotton.
1)	Color: White.
2)	Color: Blue.
3)	Color: Black.
f.	Fabric: Seamless Trevira Muslin, 100 percent polyester IFR, color - white.
3.	Flame Resistance:
a.	All Polyester fabrics are woven from fibers that are inherently flame retardant for the life of the fabric. These curtains never need to be re-treated for flame retardancy.
b.	100 percent cotton fabrics are to be chemically mill treated by an immersion process. This process lasts approximately 5 years and then shall be re-done for flame retardancy according to the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association's NFPA #701 together with dry cleaning.
c.	A Certificate of Flame Resistance is to be provided for each fabric supplied. The certificates shall be issued by the fabric manufacturer or converter. Certificates issued by the supplier or fabricator are not acceptable.
d.	Each curtain is to be labeled with a permanent tag giving the flame retardancy information and providing a suggested date for testing, if applicable.
4.	Fabrication:
a.	General: Curtains are to be fabricated in the sizes and fabrics shown in the curtain schedule. Curtains are to be stitched with thread matching the color of the curtain using a single needle lock stitched. No less than full widths of fabric are to be used in leg curtains. All fabrics with a grain or pile shall have all strips running in the same direction.
b.	Fullness: Fullness as listed in the Curtain Schedule is to be in addition to allowances for seams, side hems and turn backs.
c.	Pleats: Where fullness is indicated in the Curtain Schedule, pleats shall be box type on 12 inch (305 mm) centers. Valances and borders are to have their pleats arranged to conceal the seams.
d.	Top Finish: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) jute webbing or 3 inch (76 mm) Poly webbing shall be double stitched to the top of the curtain with 2 inch (50.8 mm) of face fabric turned under the webbing. Brass rustproof grommets shall be inserted in pleat centers (12 inch (305 mm)) centers on flat curtains.
e.	Track-mounted curtains shall be supplied with plated wire S-hooks or CCF-2 curtain to carrier snap hooks. Batten-mounted curtains are to be supplied with 36 inch (914 mm) braided #4 cotton tie lines. Tie lines shall be black or white to best match the curtains with the center line in an alternate color to aid in hanging curtains.
f.	Bottom Hems:
1)	Valances and borders shall have 4 inch (102 mm) bottom hems.
2)	All full height curtains shall have 6 inch (152 mm) bottom hems complete with separate interior chain pockets filled with #8 plated jack chains. Chain pockets shall be stitched so that the chain shall ride 2 inch (51 mm) above the finished bottom edge of the curtain.
3)	Scrims, drops and cycloramas shall have an additional strip of webbing with ties on 12 inch (305 mm) centers sewn to the back of the hem and shall be furnished with a 3/4 inch (19 mm) pipe batten, threaded and coupled every 10 feet-0 inch (305 mm).
g.	Side Hems:
1)	All lined traveler curtains shall have 1/2 width of face fabric turned back at the leading edge.
2)	All other side hems shall be 2 inch (51 mm).
h.	Lining: Lining, if required in the above listing, shall conform to the following requirements.
1)	Lining shall be in the same fullness as face fabric.
2)	Lining shall finish 2 inch (51 mm) shorter than face fabric.
3)	Lining shall be attached to the face fabric along the sides and bottom hems by 4 inch (102 mm) twill tape.
C.	Heavy Duty Curtain Track:
1.	280 HD Curtain Track.
2.	Track shall be of 14 ga (1.980 mm) galvanized construction, entirely enclosed except for the slot in the bottom. Each section of track less than 20 ft (6,096 mm) shall be in one continuous piece. Splice clamps shall be permitted for section lengths over 20 ft (6,096 mm).
3.	Carriers shall be constructed of nylon, supported from two heavy-duty polyethylene wheels held in the ball bearing by a nickel-plated steel rivet. Each carrier shall be equipped with a free-moving swivel and sufficient trim chain to accommodate a curtain S-hook. Each carrier shall have a back-pack. Rubber washers shall be provided between each back-pack and carrier to reduce noise.
4.	The Master Carrier block shall be constructed of plated steel having two cable clips to clamp the cord to the carrier. Four wheels in pairs identical to the single carrier above shall support the block.
5.	Live and dead end pulleys shall be adjustable, equipped with oil-impregnated sleeve bearing wheels on adequately guarded plated steel housings. End stops at each track end and one adjustable, demountable floor pulley shall be furnished. Stretch-resistant, fiberglass center operating cord shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in diameter.
6.	Track shall be rigged for bi-parting operation with a 36 inch (914.4 mm) center overlap. Hanging clamps shall be provided for suspension at 6 ft (1,829 mm) foot maximum intervals.
D.	Medium Duty Curtain Track:
1.	170 (171-N,171-R,172, 260) MD Curtain Track.
2.	Track shall be of 14 ga (1.980 mm) galvanized construction, entirely enclosed except for the slot in the bottom. Each section of track less than 20 ft (6,096 mm) shall be in one continuous piece. Splice clamps shall be permitted for section lengths over 20 ft (6,096 mm).
3.	Carriers shall be constructed of plated steel, supported from two heavy-duty polyethylene wheels (171-N,171-R utilize nylon-tired ball-bearing and neoprene-tired ball-bearing respectively) attached to the carrier body by a nickel-plated steel rivet. Each carrier shall be equipped with a free-moving plated steel swivel to accommodate a curtain S-hook. Back-Pack guides are available as an option with all system models. Rubber washers shall be provided between each back-pack and carrier to reduce noise.
4.	The Master Carrier block shall be constructed of plated steel having two tension type cable clamps to secure the cord to the carrier. Four wheels in pairs identical to the single carrier above shall support the block.
5.	Live and dead end pulleys shall be adjustable, equipped with oil-impregnated sleeve bearing wheels on adequately guarded plated steel housings. End stops at each track end and one adjustable floor pulley (detachable as an option) shall be furnished. Stretch-resistant, fiberglass center operating cord shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in diameter for hand operated track systems and 3/16" (4.76 mm) in diameter wire center cable with woven polyester covers shall be used for motorized operations.
6.	Track shall be rigged for bi-parting operation with a 36 inch (914.4 mm) center overlap. Hanging clamps shall be provided for suspension at 6 ft (1,829 mm) foot maximum intervals.
E.	Curved Curtain Track:
1.	140 Curved Curtain Track.
2.	Track shall be 11 ga (3.180 mm) extruded aluminum I-beam construction consisting of a center rib and top, intermediate and bottom flanges.
3.	Each curtain carrier shall be spaced on 12 inch (304.8 mm) centers and shall be of steel construction to include two nylon-tired ball bearing wheels rolling on two separate parallel treads. Each carrier shall contain a free moving plated swivel to accommodate curtain snap hook. Two rubber bumpers shall be attached to each carrier to function as noise reducers.
4.	Live and dead end pulleys shall be equipped with sleeve bearing wheels adequately guarded. A tension floor pulley shall be supplied. Stretch resistant operating cord shall have fiberglass center and shall be of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter, extra quality yarn or 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) diameter, wire center with woven polyester cover on motorized tracks.
5.	Curves shall be formed on the job. Spindles and idlers equipped with ball bearings shall be provided as necessary for hand line management on curves.
6.	A 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) I.D. stiffening batten shall be used to support suspended curved track. Track shall be rigidly supported from ceiling clamps or hanging clamps on four foot maximum centers.
F.	Walk Along Curtain Track:
1.	142 Walk Along Curtain Track.
2.	Track shall be 11 ga (3.18 mm) extruded aluminum I-beam construction consisting of a center rib and top, intermediate and bottom flanges.
3.	Each curtain carrier shall be spaced on 12 inch (304.8 mm) centers and shall be of steel construction to include two nylon-tired ball bearing wheels rolling on two separate parallel treads. Each carrier shall contain a free moving plated swivel to accommodate curtain snap hook. Two rubber bumpers shall be attached to each carrier to function as noise reducers.
4.	Curves shall be formed on the job.
5.	A 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) I.D. stiffening batten to support suspended curved track shall be provided. Track shall be rigidly supported from ceiling clamps or hanging clamps on four foot maximum centers.
G.	Heavy Duty Curved Curtain Track:
1.	500 HD Curved Curtain Track shall be 7 gauge (4.76 mm) extruded aluminum I-beam construction consisting of a center rib and top, intermediate and bottom flanges.
2.	Curtain carriers shall be spaced on 12 inch (304.8 mm) centers and shall be of steel construction to include two nylon-tired ball bearing wheels rolling on two separate parallel treads with rubber strips and a free moving plated swivel and trim chain to accommodate curtain snap hook. Master carriers shall contain two additional wheels and pull rope clamps.
3.	Live and dead end pulley blocks shall be equipped with 5 inch (127 mm) diameter sleeve bearing wheels adequately guarded.
4.	Nylon cable guides shall be furnished for the purpose of guiding the operating cable along the contour of the factory formed curved track channel. Stretch resistant operating cord shall be 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) diameter extruded nylon with wire center for motorized operation.
5.	Curves shall be factory formed to a minimum radius of 2 ft (609.6 mm). A 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) I.D. stiffening batten shall be used to support suspended curved track.
6.	Track shall be opened and closed by motorized curtain machine.
7.	Track shall be rigidly supported from ceiling clamps or hanging clamps on 5 feet (1,524 mm) maximum centers.
H.	Roller Chain Track: 
1.	SURETRACK Roller Chain Track. 
2.	Tracks shall be motorized and shall consist of a roller chain riding in a UHMW lined track channel. The assembly can be constructed in straight and gently curved sections. Sharp bends can be made using chain sprockets mounted in bearing assemblies. Bends can have a minimum radius of 2 inch (50.8 mm). 
3.	The roller chain forms an endless loop. Tabs are attached to the links on 12 inch (304.8 mm) centers so curtains do not stack when stored. Bi-part operation is possible by placing one panel on each side of the chain loop while a single panel shall reverse when the back of the chain loop is revealed so curtains can be double faced. 
4.	Curtain storage is provided by incorporating several runs of parallel channels that can be as close as 4 inch (102 mm) apart. 
5.	The drive motor can be incorporated at any point along the track assembly and limit switches can be either track mounted or rotary driven by the motor. 
6.	The motor, brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer. Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting and electrically released. The brake shall be an AC/DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of motor full load torque. 
7.	An adjustable sprocket provides chain tensioning.
I.	Standard Curtain Machine.
1.	Standard Curtain Machine.
2.	Curtain machines shall be fully automatic type equipped a motor connected through a V-belt to the gear unit. A grooved cable drum shall be located on the output shaft of the gearbox. Drum shall deliver a cable speed of 86 fpm (0.437 mps) and shall hold sufficient cable for 45 ft (13.7 m) of cable travel.
3.	Mechanism shall include a magnetic contactor to provide reversing action at any point along the travel. Two three-button control switch units shall be provided: One mounted on the unit; and one for remote control.
4.	A limit switch assembly shall be mounted integrally with gear unit. A safety guard shall be over the V-belt drive and limit switch chain drive.
5.	The machine shall be equipped with disconnect switch, automatic overload protective breaker, and an emergency hand crank for conversion to hand operation.
6.	The entire mechanism shall be mounted on heavy base.
J.	Heavy Duty Curtain Machine:
1.	HD Curtain Machine.
2.	Curtain machines shall be fully automatic type equipped a motor connected directly to the gear unit. A grooved cable drum shall be located on the output shaft of the gearbox and supported by an outboard bearing to support and align extended shaft. Cable tension device shall automatically remove slack from cable and retain cable within drum grooves. Drum shall deliver a cable speed of 72 fpm (0.36 mps) and shall hold sufficient cable for 90 ft (27.43 m) of cable travel.
3.	Mechanism shall include a magnetic contactor to provide reversing action at any point along the travel. Two three-button control switch units shall be provided: One mounted on the unit; and one for remote control.
4.	A limit switch shall be driven from output drive shaft of gear reduction unit.
5.	The machine shall be equipped with disconnect switch, automatic overload protective breaker, and an emergency hand crank for conversion to hand operation.
6.	The entire mechanism shall be mounted on heavy base.
2.44	ROPE AND DEAD HUNG RIGGING
A.	Wire Tension Grid:
1.	General:
a.	The wire grid shall be designed for a live load capacity of 10 psf (48.82 ksm). The maximum tension in any one line shall not exceed 650 lbs (295 kg). The support frame shall be designed so that compression loads caused by tension in the cables do not exceed 5000 lbs (2,257.9 kg) in any member. Wire ropes shall be supported on not more than 5 feet (1,524 mm) centers. The galvanized utility cable mesh shall not deflect more than two inches under a maximum concentrated load of 250 lbs (113.4 kg). The live load on any one grid hanger pipe shall not exceed 500 lbs (226.8 kg). There shall be no horizontal loads imposed upon the building by the design of the grid except for sway braces to add lateral stability.
b.	The total live load and the weight of the grid shall be transmitted through the hangers to the building steel overhead. The building steel is not a part of this work, except for specific auxiliary steel clearly called out in these specifications or related drawings.
c.	The wire rope grid shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with best trade practices.
d.	Standards of workmanship, design, and fabrication for structural steel shall be AISC Code of Standard Practice and ASTM A36.
e.	Coordinate work with other trades doing adjoining work to assure proper fit, and installation.
2.	Materials And Components:
a.	All materials shall be new and of best quality. Fittings and fasteners shall be painted or galvanized and shall conform to applicable industry requirements and codes.
b.	Structural steel shall be ASTM Grade A-36.
c.	Pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM Specification A-53.
d.	Wire Rope and Fittings:
1)	Wire rope shall be 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable of diameters and construction as hereinafter specified and/or shown on the drawings.
2)	Swaged sleeve fittings shall be copper Nicopress.
3)	Other fittings, clips, thimbles as indicated and/or required shall be galvanized and conform to wire rope manufacturer's recommendations. All cable clips shall be drop forged.
4)	Bolts, nuts, washers as required for complete fabrication and installation.
e.	Galvanized hardware and items of non-corrosive metal shall not be shop painted. All other metal work under this section shall have one coat of approved shop paint after fabrication.
f.	Workmanship:
1)	Fabricate metal work in accordance with standards of first class workmanship with ornamental work free of blemishes like tool marks, burrs, scars and abrasions. All edges shall be smooth. All points, welds and intersections shall be properly made and fitted to provide a uniform finish.
2)	All connection points shall be welded and ground smooth.
3)	Make proper provisions for expansion and contraction without causing undue stresses or deformation.
4)	Provide slotted holes, as needed, in steel members which require accurate alignment.
5)	Fit abutting surfaces closely.
6)	Accurately align and adjust various frame members before final anchoring.
7)	Erect metal work level, plumb, square and in proper alignment with adjacent work.
g.	Welding:
1)	Execute welding in shop and field in accordance with standards of American Welding Society. All welders shall be qualified in accordance with standard qualification procedure of American Welding Society.
2)	Control welding sequence and technique to minimize secondary stresses and distortions.
3)	Net effective weld lengths shall be indicated on the shop drawings and approved before fabrication and installation.
h.	Grid Construction:
1)	Support structure shall be fabricated of tubes and other structural steel, suspended from 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) I.D. pipe hangers.
2)	Woven wire mesh tension grid shall be fabricated of 1/8 inch (3.17 mm) wire rope attached to, and supported by, the steel support structure. Grid cables shall be woven in an over and under pattern. Cables are threaded through holes drilled on 2 inches centers in the structural perimeter members.
3)	One end of each cable shall be secured with a 1/8 inch (3.17 mm) Nicopress stop sleeve; the other with a swaged threaded stud fitting which is used to adjust tension in the cables during assembly.
B.	Pipe Grid:
1.	Pipe grids shall be constructed from lengths of 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) nominal I.D. schedule 40 iron pipe. All joints shall be sleeve spliced with 18 inches (457.2 mm) long sleeves with 9 inches (228.6 mm) into each pipe and held by two 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint. Grids shall be installed as indicated on the drawings with pipes intersecting on four foot by four-foot centers.
2.	Intersecting pipes shall be joined with a Cross Grid Clamp or by an approved equal. The cross grid clamp shall have a recommended working load of at least 1,500 lbs (680 kg). U-bolts are not acceptable.
3.	Each pipe shall terminate just off the wall. Internally sleeved wall plates shall securely brace the grid against the wall once it is in place. Supply sufficient braces to prevent lateral movement of the pipe grid.
4.	The grid shall be rigidly hung from the overhead steel structures on centers not exceeding 8 feet in either direction using 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), 7x19 galvanized utility cable ending in 6 inches x 3/8 inch (152.4 mm x 9.5 mm) forged turnbuckles attached to pipe clamps or connector strip hanging brackets. At each hanging point the cable shall attach to the overhead structure with an appropriate fitting. Cables shall be formed over thimbles of correct size and fastened with two forged cable clips or Nicopress sleeves. Turnbuckles shall be safetied with tie wire after final trim.
C.	Fixed Pipe Batten:
1.	All battens shall be 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) nominal diameter, schedule 40 pipe in lengths as shown on the drawings or Bill of Materials. All joints shall be spliced with 18 inches (457.2 mm) long sleeves with 9 inches (228.6 mm) extending into each pipe and held by two 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint.
2.	Each end shall be covered with a bright yellow, closed end, soft vinyl safety cap at least 4 inches (101.6 mm) in length.
3.	The batten shall be hung from the overhead steel structure on ten foot maximum centers using 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), 7x19 galvanized utility cables ending in 6 inches x 3/8 inch (152.4 mm x 9.5 mm) forged turnbuckles attached to pipe clamps. At each hanging point the cable shall attached to the overhead structure with a beam clamps or other appropriated fitting. Cables shall be formed over thimbles of the correct size and fastened with two forged cable clips or Nicopress sleeves. All turnbuckles are to be safetied with tie wire after final trimming.
D.	Rope Rigging:
1.	Single Pin Rail:
a.	The pin rail shall consist of a 3.5 inches (88.9 mm) I.D., schedule 40 pipe with 4 inches (101.6 mm) channel legs welded to the pipe on 4 feet (1,219 mm) centers maximum. The center of the pin rail shall be 3 feet-10 inches (914.4 mm) above the floor. Holes shall be located on 12 inches (304.8 mm) centers for belaying pins.
b.	The legs shall end at an angle or plate bracket as required and shall be bolted or welded to the floor in a manner suitable to the design load and structure.
2.	Double Pin Rail:
a.	The pin rail shall consist of two 3.5 inches (88.9 mm) I.D., schedule 40 pipes mounted parallel to each other, offset both vertically and horizontally, supported by 4 inches (101.6 mm) channel legs welded to the pipe on 4feet (1,219 mm) centers maximum. Holes shall be located on 12 inches (304.8 mm) centers for belaying pins.
b.	The legs shall end at an angle or plate bracket as required and shall be bolted or welded to the floor in a manner suitable to the design load.
E.	Belaying Pins:
1.	Wood:
a.	Pins shall be 21 inches (533.4 mm) long by 1-5/32 inches (29.37mm) in diameter with a shoulder and handgrip at the top.
b.	Belaying pins shall be machine turned from hardwood and shall fit 1-1/4 inches (31.75 mm) diameter holes in the pin rail.
2.	Steel:
a.	Pins shall be 21 inches (533.4 mm) long by 1-1/16 inches (26.98 mm) in diameter with a shoulder and handgrip at the top and shall fit 1-5/32 inches (29.37 mm) diameter holes in the pin rail.
F.	Rope Blocks:
1.	Single Line:
a.	Nylon: Underhung Loft Block.
1)	The sheave shall have an 8 inches (203.2 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2)	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
3)	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inches (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
4)	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 300 lbs. (136.1 kg).
5)	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope line.
b.	Cast: Underhung Loft Block.
1)	The sheave shall have an 8 inches (203.2 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2)	Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
3)	A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inches (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
4)	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 300 lbs. (136.1 kg).
5)	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope line.
c.	Nylon: Universal Loft Block.
1)	The sheave shall have an 8 inches (203.2 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2)	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inches x 1-1/2 inches x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3)	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4)	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 300 lbs. (136.1 kg), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5)	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope line.
d.	Cast: Universal Loft Block.
1)	The sheave shall have an 8 inches (203.2 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2)	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inches x 1-1/2 inches x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3)	Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4)	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 kg), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5)	Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope line.
2.	Multi Line:
a.	Nylon: Underhung Loft Block.
1)	The sheaves shall have an 8 inches (203.2 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The block shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings per sheave.
2)	The block housing shall have side plates between each sheave and on the outside. Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.570 mm), with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
3)	Two machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolts and steel clips shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inches (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
4)	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 600 lbs (272.2 kg).
5)	Loft blocks shall have two to five sheaves grooved for 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope.
b.	Cast: Underhung Loft Block.
1)	The sheaves shall have an 8 inches (203.2 mm) outside diameter, and shall be iron castings with machined grooves. The block shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings per sheave.
2)	The block housing shall have side plates between each sheave and on the outside. Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
3)	Two machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolts and steel clips shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inches (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
4)	The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 600 lbs (272.1 kg).
5)	Loft blocks shall have two to five sheaves grooved for 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope.
c.	Nylon: Universal loft Block.
1)	The sheaves shall have an 8 inches (203 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The block shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings per sheave.
2)	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inches x 1-1/2 inches x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle with the base angles turned in and notched to allow close mounting centers.
3)	The block housing shall have side plates between each sheave and on the outside. Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4)	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 600 lbs (272.2 kg), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5)	Loft blocks shall have with two to five sheaves grooved for 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope.
d.	Cast: Universal loft Block.
1)	The sheaves shall have an 8-1/2 inches (209.55 mm) outside diameter, and shall be iron castings with machined grooves. The block shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings per sheave.
2)	Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inches x 1-1/2 inches x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle with the base angles turned in and notched to allow close mounting centers.
3)	The block housing shall have side plates between each sheave and on the outside. Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheaves. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4)	The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 600 lbs (272. 2kg), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5)	Loft blocks shall have two to five sheaves grooved for 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope.
3.	Pivot Bracket:
a.	Pivot brackets mount loft blocks to beams with more than 1-1/2 degrees of slope.
b.	They consist of a pair of angles that bolt to the block base angles and a matching pair of angles that mount to the beam with clips. A 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) diameter threaded rod connects the two sets of angle to provide a hinge point.
G.	Rope:
1.	SureGrip Hand Line:
a.	Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) in diameter, employing a 3 strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
b.	The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
c.	The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that becomes visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
d.	The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
e.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
2.	Multiline II Hand Line:
a.	Hand line shall employ a 3 strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
b.	The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage.
c.	Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
d.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
3.	Hand Line: Stage Set X.
a.	Hand lines shall have a parallel filament core constructed of high tenacity filament polyester. The core shall remain firm and round under all load conditions, and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage. The core shall be wrapped in polyester tape to provide the core with protection against external damage and wear. The braided polyester outer jacket shall be constructed of spun polyester for good gripping.
b.	The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
c.	Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
H.	Sand Bags:
1.	Sand bags shall be of ballistic Nylon construction, with a forged safety snap, and a Velcro closure. Grommets and a tie line shall prevent accidental opening of the Velcro. Sand bags shall be black.
PART 3    EXECUTION
3.1	EXAMINATION
A.	Examine installation areas and mounting surfaces with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's installation tolerances including required clearances, floor level, location of blocking and anchoring reinforcements, and other existing conditions that may affect installation or performance.
B.	Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C.	Proceed with installation only after correction of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2	PREPARATION
A.	Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3	INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.	Install manufactured units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, approved submittals, and in proper relationship with adjacent construction.
B.	Clean exposed surfaces. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
3.4	INSTALLATION OF SOUND-CONTROL DOORS
A.	Prior to installation, adjust sound-control door frames to within tolerances recommended by manufacturer.
B.	Prepare doors and frames to accept field-applied door hardware specified in other sections. Apply bituminous coating to inside surfaces of frames to be filled with mortar or grout. Do not otherwise modify doors and frames in the field.
C.	Install units plumb, square, in proper alignment and secured to opening, within manufacturer's recommended tolerances. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved submittals.
1.	Masonry and Concrete Walls: Where indicated, fill space between frames and adjacent wall construction with mortar or grout. Where required, pump frames full after installation; plug and fill grout access holes.
D.	Install hardware uniformly and precisely, using supplied shims. Apply sealant to threshold and both sides of frame cross member under threshold. Allow for final adjustment of hardware following installation.
E.	Adjust units and hardware so doors operate smoothly without warp or bind and close with uniform frame alignment and seal compression.
F.	Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated openings.
3.5	INSTALLATION OF FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 
A.	Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. 
B.	Anchor support standards securely to substrate with at least two anchoring devices recommended by manufacturer. 
C.	Place standards in each row laterally so the standards at the aisle will be in alignment. 
D.	Vary width of seats and backs as required to optimize sightlines and comply with the ADA Standards for row and aisle widths. 
E.	In curved rows, install standards to form smooth radius, without breaks or angled chords. 
F.	Attach components to standards with sufficient flexibility to compensate for convergence of seats toward the center. 
G.	Adjust seat mechanisms to ensure that seats in each row are aligned when unoccupied. 
H.	Repair minor abrasions and imperfections in painted finishes with a coating that matches factory-applied finish; replace units that cannot be repaired to unblemished appearance. 
I.	Replace upholstery fabric damaged or soiled during installation.
3.6	INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS
A.	Install housings utilizing manufacturer's supplied brackets and fasteners recommended for application. Adjust upper and lower limits individually after installation.
B.	Test electrically operated units to verify that motorized acoustical banner controls, limit switches, and other operating components perform in accordance with manufacturer's written requirements.
3.7	INSTALLATION OF THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
A.	Install manufactured units in location indicated to verify components are complete and operational. Adjust equipment until satisfactory results are achieved.
B.	Acoustical Cloud Installation: Install auditorium acoustical cloud units plumb, level, and true, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals. Suspend from overhead structure using specified installation accessories. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical clouds. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
C.	Acoustical Shell Installation:
1.	Acoustical Shell Towers: 
a.	Following assembly of all acoustical shell towers, use the transporter to place each acoustical shell tower in its proper playing position location on the stage, as indicated in coordination with Owner�s personnel. 
b.	Verify that all shell tower components including access doors, door locks and telescoping wing-stays are complete and operational. 
c.	Strike shell tower units following approval of assembled acoustical shell and use air or wheeled transporter to store in shell tower stacking location(s) indicated. 
2.	Acoustical Shell Ceiling Panels: 
a.	Suspend each row of acoustical ceiling panels from stage rigging using specified installation accessories, in accordance with manufacturer�s recommendations and approved submittals. 
b.	Install acoustical shell ceiling panel units plumb, level, and true.
c.	Verify setting of units in performance and storage positions.
d.	Verify adjustability of units.
e.	Install, connect, address, commission and test integral lighting.
D.	Orchestra Shell Installation: Install orchestra shell components in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 
1.	Position all components accurately as indicated on Drawings and true, plumb, and level. 
2.	Note any deviations required to adjust for field obstructions and report to required persons to incorporate changes into as-built drawings. 
3.	Installation supervisor shall be a currently certified ETCP Rigger for Theatre. 
4.	Utilize only qualified riggers for installation, trim, and adjustment. 
5.	Clean and touch up all field welds and abraded paint finishes with matching materials.
3.8	INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY CASEWORK
A.	Install plumb, level, and true; using integral levelers. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals.
1.	Install seismic bracing and fastening in accordance with approved shop drawings.
B.	Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation.
C.	Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind and close with uniform reveals.
D.	Metal Shelving Requirements: 
1.	Anchor uprights to walls using anchors of type, size, and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 
2.	Install shelves in each unit. 
3.	Erect cantilever adjustable uprights to substrate with a maximum tolerance from vertical of 1/4 inch (6 mm). 
4.	Adjust metal shelving so connectors and other components engage accurately and securely.  Verify modular components fit easily into alternate locations without force or use of tools. 
3.9	INSTALLATION OF SPECIAL PURPOSE ROOMS
A.	Install rooms under direct supervision of manufacturer. Install rooms plumb, level, and true, using integral levelers. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals.
B.	Install room components utilizing integral panel clamping mechanisms. Do not use sealants, fillers, loose insulation, or exposed fasteners.
1.	Install seismic bracing and fastening in accordance with approved shop drawings.
C.	Do not modify panels or accessories in the field. Do not fasten room frame to floor unless indicated on approved shop drawings in compliance with seismic design requirements.
D.	Adjust rooms and hardware for doors to operate smoothly without warp or bind and close with uniform compression against flanges. Adjust sweep seals.
3.10	INSTALLATION OF RIGGING SYSTEMS
A.	Equipment shall be installed by fully trained superintendents and workmen. The Rigging Contractor shall employ Entertainment Technician Certification Program (ETCP) Certified theatre Riggers. Certified Riggers shall, at a minimum, be used as the project manager and site foreman and be responsible for the overall project including the layout, inspection, and onsite user training.
B.	Equipment shall be installed per plans and specifications. Equipment shall be aligned, adjusted, and trimmed for the most efficient operation, the greatest safety and for the best visual appearance.
C.	Standards: Installation practices shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety and Health Standards and all local codes. All welding shall be performed in full compliance with the latest edition of the Structural Welding Code (ANSI/AWS D1.1).
D.	Alignment: Mule blocks, cable rollers and guides shall be installed, as required, to provide proper alignment, to maintain specified fleet angles, and to prevent contact with other surfaces.
E.	Attachments: All equipment shall be securely attached to the building structure.
3.11	INSPECTION AND TESTING OF RIGGING SYSTEMS
A.	Inspection: During the installation of equipment the Rigging Contractor shall arrange for access as necessary for inspection of equipment by the Owner's representatives.
B.	System Pre-Testing By Rigging Contractor: On completion of installation the Rigging Contractor shall conduct a complete test of the system to ensure it is working properly and in conformance with this specification.
C.	Completion Testing: Upon completing the installation, the Rigging Contractor shall notify the Owner or Owner's Representative, who shall schedule inspection and testing of the full rigging system. At the time of testing, the Rigging Contractor shall furnish sufficient workers to operate all equipment and to perform such adjustments and tests as may be required by the Owner's representative. All testing equipment and personnel shall be at the Rigging Contractor's expense. Any equipment, which fails to meet with approval, shall be repaired or replaced with suitable equipment and the inspection shall be re-scheduled under the same conditions as previously specified. At the time of these inspections, no other work shall be performed in the auditorium and stage areas. All temporary bracing, scaffolding, etc. shall be removed to permit full operation of, and access to, all equipment. Final approval shall be withheld until all systems have been thoroughly tested and found to be in full working order and meets requirements herein.
1.	Manual counterweight rigging shall be tested in accordance with ANSI E1.4 "Entertainment Technology Manual Counterweight Rigging Systems".
2.	Powered rigging shall be tested. Each hoist shall be operated over five full continuous cycles at 1.25 times its full working load at full speed and travel distance. The emergency stop function shall be tested at 100 percent WLL in both the ascending and descending directions.
a.	Demonstrate that all over travel limit switches have been correctly set for the actual field conditions of the specific project.
b.	If it applies to the project, demonstrate that all position encoders have been correctly set for the actual field conditions of the specific project.
3.	Provide written recommendations to the Owner for necessary repairs or changes not included in the warranty. Provide a copy to the rigging equipment Manufacturer and in the Operations Manual.
D.	The Owner or Owner's Representative shall witness and sign off on the inspection. A copy of the certificate shall be included in the permanent log turned over to the owner.
E.	Upon completion of the work, the Rigging Contractor shall submit 3 copies of a comprehensive Operating and Maintenance Manual including as-built shop drawings, equipment descriptions, and parts lists. The Rigging Contractor shall provide a safety and instruction class with personnel designated by the owner to demonstrate and explain the operation and maintenance of the systems.
F.	Signage with basic operating instructions and warnings shall be posted in the area where the equipment shall be operated. Signage shall be in conformance with ANSI-Z535.
3.12	RIGGING SYSTEMS, FOLLOW-UP INSPECTION
A.	The Contractor shall return to site 12 months and 24 months after system turnover and provide the following services:
1.	Inspection in accordance with ANSI E1.4-1 Entertainment Technology - Manual Counterweight Rigging Systems, ANSI E1.6-1 Entertainment Technology - Powered Hoist Systems, and ANSI E1.47 - Recommended Guidelines for Entertainment Rigging System Inspections.
2.	Make all required adjustments.
3.	Correct all warranty items and provide a written report to the Owner and Manufacturer.
4.	Provide written recommendations to the Owner and Manufacturer for necessary repairs or changes not included in the warranty.
5.	Conduct a rigging operation and safety class.
6.	Subsequent to the 24 month inspection, provide a written proposal for the following year's inspection.
3.13	FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.	Inspect installed work to verify compliance with requirements.
1.	Verify that HVAC work and electrical work complies with manufacturer's submittals and written installation requirements.
2.	Perform installation and startup checks as recommended by manufacturer.
3.	Prepare inspection reports and submit to Architect.
3.14	DEMONSTRATION
A.	Train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipment. Turn over keys, tools, and operation and maintenance instructions to Owner.
3.15	CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.	Repair or replace defective work as directed by Architect upon inspection.
B.	Clean surfaces. Touch up marred finishes, or replace damaged components that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by manufacturer.
C.	Protect installed products from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint until completion of project. Do not permit use during construction.

END OF SECTION